WO2020164454A1 - 信号传输方法和通信装置 - Google Patents

信号传输方法和通信装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020164454A1
WO2020164454A1 PCT/CN2020/074626 CN2020074626W WO2020164454A1 WO 2020164454 A1 WO2020164454 A1 WO 2020164454A1 CN 2020074626 W CN2020074626 W CN 2020074626W WO 2020164454 A1 WO2020164454 A1 WO 2020164454A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
downlink
receiving
panel
currently activated
terminal device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/074626
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
李铁
张永平
张希
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020164454A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020164454A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/046—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of wireless communication, and more specifically, to a signal transmission method and communication device.
  • the transmitter and receiver Each end can obtain gain through beamforming.
  • the sending end and the receiving end can send and receive signals through a predetermined beam pairing relationship.
  • the terminal device may be equipped with multiple antenna panels.
  • the beam can be received or transmitted through the antenna panel.
  • the terminal device may need to switch the panel first, and then switch to the corresponding beam to send and receive signals. However, it may take some time for the terminal device to switch the panel. If the terminal device switches the panel after receiving the scheduling signaling, it may have time to switch in the future, and the scheduled resource has already arrived. Therefore, the signal carried on the resource may not be successfully transmitted.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method and communication device to reduce the time delay caused by panel switching, which is beneficial to improve the transmission performance of the system.
  • a signal transmission method includes: a terminal device determines a first beam for receiving a downlink signal or a downlink channel, where the first beam is a beam on a currently activated panel; and the terminal device receives the downlink signal through the first beam Or downlink channel.
  • this method may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device can use the beam on the currently activated panel to receive the downlink signal or the downlink channel, which can avoid the large delay caused by the panel activation. Even if the terminal equipment needs to perform panel switching or beam switching, the delay caused by it is far reduced. Therefore, it is beneficial for the terminal device to complete panel switching or beam switching before the scheduled resource arrives, and use the selected beam to receive the downlink signal or the downlink channel. This helps to improve the transmission performance of the system.
  • the terminal device does not need to activate all panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation. In this way, all the panels of the terminal device do not need to be in the active state for a long time, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • the terminal device determining the first beam used to receive the downlink signal or the downlink channel includes: the terminal device determines the default beam according to the currently activated panel , The default beam is the first beam used to receive downlink signals or downlink channels.
  • the terminal device may determine the first beam by itself according to the currently activated panel, so that the determined first beam is the beam on the currently activated panel.
  • a signal transmission method includes: a terminal device determines a first beam used to transmit an uplink signal or an uplink channel, where the first beam is a beam on a currently activated panel; and the terminal device transmits the first beam through the first beam Uplink signal or said uplink channel.
  • the method provided in the second aspect may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device can use the beam on the currently activated panel to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel, which can avoid the large delay caused by the panel activation. Even if the terminal equipment needs to perform panel switching or beam switching, the delay caused by it is far reduced. Therefore, it is beneficial for the terminal device to complete panel switching or beam switching before the scheduled resource arrives, and use the selected beam to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel. This helps to improve the transmission performance of the system. In addition, the terminal device does not need to activate all the panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • the terminal device determining the first beam used to transmit the uplink signal or the uplink channel includes: the terminal device determines the default beam according to the currently activated panel , The default beam is the first beam used to transmit uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the terminal device may determine the first beam by itself according to the currently activated panel, so that the determined first beam is the beam on the currently activated panel.
  • the default beam refers to beams satisfying preset conditions on one or more panels that are currently activated.
  • one or more preset conditions may be defined in advance, so that the terminal device can determine the default beam from one or more panels currently activated.
  • the preset condition may be predefined by the protocol, for example. This application does not limit the specific content of the preset conditions.
  • L, M and N are all integers.
  • the default beam refers to the receive beam of the first physical downlink control channel used in the first time slot
  • the receive beam of the first physical downlink control channel is one or more of the receive beams on the currently activated panel.
  • the control resource set identifies the receiving beam corresponding to the control resource set with the smallest ID, and the one or more control resource sets are the control resource sets monitored by the terminal device in the first time slot; the first time slot is one The one or more time slots closest to the reference time slot, each of the one or more time slots is configured with one or more control resource sets, and the one or more time slots At least one of the one or more resource sets configured in each time slot in, has at least one receiving beam that controls the resource set on the currently activated panel.
  • the first time slot satisfies: condition a) the first time slot contains one or more control resource sets monitored by terminal equipment; condition b) there is at least one control resource in the one or more control resource sets in the first time slot The received beams of the set are on the currently activated panel; condition c) the first time slot is the one or more time slots meeting the above conditions a) and condition b) that are closest to the scheduled resource from the reference time slot Time slot.
  • the first PDCCH satisfies: condition a) that the receiving beam is on the currently activated panel; condition b) the PDCCH transmitted in the control resource set with the smallest ID in one or more control resource sets monitored by the terminal device in the first time slot.
  • first time slot and the reference time slot may be different time slots or the same time slot. This application does not limit this.
  • the default beam refers to the L used for receiving the synchronization signal block of M times closest to the reference time slot among the beams determined by the random access procedure on the currently activated N panels for receiving synchronization signal blocks. Beams.
  • the default beam can at least refer to:
  • the one used for receiving the synchronization signal block closest to the reference time slot the one used for receiving the synchronization signal block closest to the reference time slot;
  • the beam used for receiving the synchronization signal block closest to the reference time slot on each panel that is, a total of N Beams;
  • the default beam refers to the beam used for transmission of the physical uplink control channel with the smallest identifier among the physical uplink control channels on the currently activated N panels in the activated uplink bandwidth part (BWP).
  • the identifier of the physical uplink control channel may refer to, for example, an identifier of a physical uplink control channel resource or an identifier of a physical uplink control channel resource set.
  • the default beam refers to the beam used for transmission of the physical uplink control channel with the smallest identifier among the currently activated N panels.
  • the beam referenced by the default beam may not be the beam used to transmit the physical uplink control channel in the activated uplink BWP.
  • the default beam refers to the L beams used for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels that are closest to the reference timeslot M times among the beams used for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels on the currently activated N panels.
  • the default beam can at least refer to:
  • the beam used for the reception of the downlink signal or downlink channel closest to the reference time slot is the beam used for the reception of the downlink signal or downlink channel closest to the reference time slot.
  • the beam used for receiving the downlink signal or downlink channel closest to the reference time slot on each panel that is, a total of N beams;
  • the beams used to receive downlink signals or downlink channels on the currently activated N panels the beams used for receiving the N downlink signals or downlink channels that are closest to the reference time slot, that is, a total of L (1 ⁇ L ⁇ N ) Beams.
  • the beam used to receive the downlink signal or the downlink channel may be determined by the initial access procedure or the random access procedure described below, or may be determined by other methods.
  • the default beam refers to the receiving position of the downlink signal or downlink channel M times closest to the reference time slot among the beams used to receive the downlink signal or downlink channel determined by the initial access process on the currently activated N panels. L beams used.
  • the beams used for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels that the default beams listed above can refer to may be determined by the initial access procedure.
  • the default beam refers to the receiving position of the downlink signal or downlink channel M times closest to the reference time slot among the beams used to receive the downlink signal or downlink channel determined by the random access process on the currently activated N panels. L beams used.
  • the beams used for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels that can be referred to by the default beams listed above may be determined by the random access procedure.
  • the default beam refers to the beam used for receiving the first synchronization signal block on the currently activated N panels, and the first synchronization signal block is determined by the initial access procedure.
  • the initial access procedure is used to determine the first synchronization signal block, and the receiving beam of the first synchronization signal block can be used as a reference beam to determine the default beam.
  • the default beam refers to the L beams used for sending uplink signals or uplink channels for M times closest to the reference time slot among the beams used to transmit uplink signals or uplink channels on the currently activated N panels.
  • the default beam reference can at least refer to:
  • the beam used for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels on the currently activated N panels the beam used for the transmission of the uplink signal or uplink channel closest to the reference time slot;
  • the beam used for the transmission of the uplink signal or uplink channel closest to the reference time slot on each panel that is, a total of N beams;
  • the beams used to receive downlink signals or downlink channels on the currently activated N panels the beams used for sending the N uplink signals or uplink channels closest to the reference time slot, that is, a total of L (1 ⁇ L ⁇ N ) Beams.
  • the reference time slot may refer to the time slot where the transmission resource of the signal or channel scheduled or triggered by the network device is located.
  • the reference time slot may be, for example, the time slot where the physical downlink control channel is located, or the time slot where the physical downlink shared channel is located, or the downlink reference signal (such as channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS)).
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • the reference time slot may also be, for example, the time slot where the physical uplink control channel is located, or the time slot where the physical uplink shared channel is located, or the time slot where the transmission resources of the uplink reference signal (such as sounding reference signal (SRS)) are located. Wait.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the beam referred to by the default beam listed above may be a receiving beam or a transmitting beam. This application does not limit this.
  • the default beam can be determined with reference to the receiving beam, or it can be determined with reference to the transmitting beam.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives first indication information from a network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first beam.
  • the terminal device may determine the first beam according to the instruction of the network device.
  • a beam indication method includes: a network device generates first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate a first beam; the first beam is a beam used by a terminal device to receive a downlink signal or a downlink channel, and the first beam Is the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device; the network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the method provided in the third aspect may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
  • the network device indicates the first beam to the terminal device through the first indication information, and the first beam is a beam on a panel currently activated by the terminal device. Therefore, the terminal device can use the beam on the currently activated panel to receive the downlink signal or the downlink channel, which can avoid the large delay caused by the panel activation. Even if the terminal equipment needs to perform panel switching or beam switching, the delay caused by it is far reduced. Therefore, it is beneficial for the terminal device to complete panel switching or beam switching before the scheduled resource arrives, and use the selected beam to receive the downlink signal or the downlink channel. This helps to improve the transmission performance of the system. In addition, the terminal device does not need to activate all panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation. In this way, all the panels of the terminal device do not need to be in the active state for a long time, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • a beam indication method includes: a network device generates first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate a first beam; the first beam is a beam used by a terminal device to transmit an uplink signal or an uplink channel, and the first beam Is the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device; the network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the method provided in the fourth aspect may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
  • the network device indicates the first beam to the terminal device through the first instruction, and the first beam is the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device. Therefore, the terminal device can use the beam on the currently activated panel to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel, which can avoid the large delay caused by the panel activation. Even if the terminal equipment needs to perform panel switching or beam switching, the delay caused by it is far reduced. Therefore, it is beneficial for the terminal device to complete panel switching or beam switching before the scheduled resource arrives, and use the selected beam to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel. This helps to improve the transmission performance of the system. In addition, the terminal device does not need to activate all the panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • the first indication information is carried in downlink control information (DCI), media access control (MAC)-control element One or more of (control element, CE) and radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) messages.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • MAC media access control
  • CE control element
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the network device may use different signaling to indicate the first beam for different downlink signals or downlink channels.
  • the first indication information is, for example, carried in existing signaling.
  • One or more of the above-mentioned DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages can also be carried in newly added signaling. This application does not limit this.
  • the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages are only examples for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of using other signaling to carry the first indication information, nor does it exclude the possibility of defining other names for the above signaling. In other words, the first indication information may be carried in one or more of physical layer signaling and higher layer signaling.
  • a signal transmission method includes: the terminal device determines a second beam used to transmit an uplink signal or an uplink channel, the second beam and the third beam used to receive the scheduling channel are beams on the same panel, and the scheduling channel is used for scheduling Or trigger the uplink signal or uplink channel; the terminal device transmits the uplink signal or uplink channel through the second beam.
  • the method provided in the fifth aspect may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
  • the scheduling channel may be a channel used for scheduling uplink resources to transmit uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the network device may schedule the PUSCH through a scheduling channel, and the scheduling channel may be a PDCCH, for example.
  • the scheduling channel can also be used to trigger the transmission of uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the network device may trigger the transmission of aperiodic SRS through a scheduling channel, and the scheduling channel may also be a PDCCH, for example.
  • the scheduling channel is only defined for ease of understanding and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • the scheduling channels may be different channels. This application does not limit the specific channel used as the scheduling channel.
  • the terminal device can determine the second beam used to transmit the uplink signal or the uplink channel according to the panel where the third beam used by the receiving scheduling channel is located. Since the terminal device uses the third beam when receiving the scheduling channel, the panel where the third beam is located is the activated panel, and the second beam is determined on the panel, that is, the second beam is determined on the currently activated panel . This can avoid the large time delay caused by panel activation.
  • the terminal device does not need to activate all panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation. In this way, all the panels of the terminal device do not need to be in the active state for a long time, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • the terminal device determining the second beam used to transmit the uplink signal or the uplink channel includes: the terminal device determines the second beam to be used according to the panel where the third beam is located. Used to transmit the uplink signal or the second beam of the uplink channel.
  • the terminal device can determine the second beam by itself according to the currently activated panel, so that the determined first beam is the beam on the currently activated panel.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives third indication information from the network device, where the third indication information indicates that it is used to send an uplink signal or an uplink channel Second beam.
  • the terminal device may determine the second beam according to the instruction of the network device.
  • a beam indication method includes: the network device determines the second beam according to the panel where the third beam is located, the second beam and the third beam are beams on the same panel, and the second beam is used for the terminal device to send uplink signals or uplink
  • the third beam is a beam used for the terminal device to receive the scheduling channel, and the scheduling channel is used to schedule or trigger the uplink signal or the uplink channel; the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device, the The third indication information indicates the second beam.
  • the method provided in the sixth aspect may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
  • the scheduling channel may be a channel used for scheduling uplink resources to transmit uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the network device may schedule the PUSCH through a scheduling channel, and the scheduling channel may be a PDCCH, for example.
  • the scheduling channel can also be used to trigger the transmission of uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the network device may trigger the transmission of aperiodic SRS through a scheduling channel, and the scheduling channel may also be a PDCCH, for example.
  • scheduling channel is only defined for ease of understanding and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • the scheduling channels may be different channels. This application does not limit the specific channel used as the scheduling channel.
  • the network device indicates the second beam to the terminal device through the third indication information, and the second beam is the beam on the panel currently activated by the terminal device. Therefore, the panel where the third beam used by the terminal device is located can be used to determine the second beam used to transmit the uplink signal or the uplink channel. Since the terminal device uses the third beam when receiving the scheduling channel, the panel where the third beam is located is the activated panel, and the second beam on the panel is also the beam on the currently activated panel. This can avoid the large time delay caused by panel activation. Even if the terminal equipment needs to perform panel switching or beam switching, the delay caused by it is far reduced.
  • the terminal device it is beneficial for the terminal device to complete panel switching or beam switching before the scheduled resource arrives, and use the selected beam to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel. This helps to improve the transmission performance of the system.
  • the terminal device does not need to activate all panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation. In this way, all the panels of the terminal device do not need to be in the active state for a long time, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • a panel indication method includes: a terminal device receives a panel activation command from a network device at a first time node, the panel activation command is used to activate one or more panels; the terminal device transmits and receives signals at a second time node; wherein The time interval between the first time node and the second time node is greater than or equal to the sum of the duration of panel activation, the duration of panel switching, and the duration of correctly receiving the panel activation command.
  • the method provided in the seventh aspect may be executed by a terminal device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can activate the panel according to the panel activation command of the network device, by limiting the time interval between the second time node and the first time node to be greater than or equal to the panel activation time, the panel switching time, and the correct reception of the panel activation
  • the sum of the command duration can ensure that the terminal device completes the panel switching before the signal or channel transmission resource arrives, so that the beam on the active panel can be used to send and receive signals when the signal or channel transmission resource arrives. This helps to improve the transmission performance of the system.
  • the terminal device does not need to activate all panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation. In this way, all the panels of the terminal device do not need to be in the active state for a long time, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • a panel indication method includes: the network device sends a panel activation command to the terminal device at a first time node, the panel activation command is used to activate one or more panels; the network device transmits and receives signals at a second time node; wherein, the first time node The time interval between the first time node and the second time node is greater than or equal to the sum of the duration of panel activation, the duration of panel switching, and the duration of the terminal device correctly receiving the panel activation command.
  • the method provided in the eighth aspect may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device.
  • the network device activates the panel of the terminal device through the panel activation command, and limits the time interval between the second time node and the first time node to be greater than or equal to the panel activation time, the panel switching time, and the correct reception of the panel activation
  • the sum of the command duration can ensure that the terminal device completes the panel switching before the signal or channel transmission resource arrives, so that the beam on the active panel can be used to send and receive signals when the signal or channel transmission resource arrives. This helps to improve the transmission performance of the system.
  • the terminal device does not need to activate all panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation. In this way, all the panels of the terminal device do not need to be in the active state for a long time, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • the panel activation command is beam indication information.
  • the panel activation command can reuse existing signaling.
  • the beam indicated by the beam indication information has a corresponding relationship with the panel, and the corresponding relationship may be pre-defined, such as protocol definition, or may be reported by the terminal device to the network device in advance. This application does not limit this.
  • the network device indicates the beam through the beam indication information, it also indirectly indicates the panel that needs to be activated.
  • the beam indication information may be, for example, the first indication information described in the first aspect to the fourth aspect, or the third indication information described in the fifth aspect or the sixth aspect.
  • the panel activation command includes an indication of one or more panels that need to be activated.
  • the network device can also indicate the panels that need to be activated through existing signaling or newly added signaling.
  • the network device may directly indicate an indication of a panel that needs to be activated, or may indicate other identifiers that have a corresponding relationship with the panel, such as reference signal resources. This application does not limit this.
  • the panel activation command is configured in one or more of the radio resource control RRC message, the medium access control information element MAC-CE, and the downlink control information DCI in.
  • the existing signaling can be reused to indicate the panels that need to be activated, so that the signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives a panel switching command, and the panel switching command is used to instruct to switch to one or the other activated by the panel activation command. Some or all of multiple panels.
  • the method further includes: the network device sends a panel switching command, where the panel switching command is used to instruct to switch to one or more of the panel activation commands. Some or all of the panels.
  • the network device may further notify the terminal device through the panel switching command, so that the terminal device can switch the panel according to the panel switching command after activating the panel.
  • the panel activation command and the panel switching command may be the same field in the same signaling, that is, an instruction to complete activation and switching through the same field.
  • the panel that needs to be activated and the panel that needs to be switched indicated by the network device may be the same.
  • the terminal device can switch the panel to all active panels.
  • the panel activation command and the panel switching command may be different fields in the same signaling, that is, the activation and switching instructions are completed through different fields.
  • the panel that needs to be activated and the panel that needs to be switched indicated by the network device may be the same or different.
  • the terminal device can switch the panel to all or part of the active panel.
  • the panel activation command and the panel switching command may be different signaling.
  • the panel that needs to be activated and the panel that needs to be switched indicated by the network device may be the same or different.
  • the terminal device can switch the panel to all or part of the active panel.
  • the panel switching command is beam indication information.
  • this panel switching command can reuse existing signaling.
  • the beam indicated by the beam indication information has a corresponding relationship with the panel.
  • the network device indicates the beam through the beam indication information, it also indirectly indicates the panel to be switched.
  • the panel switching command includes an indication of the panel to be switched.
  • the panel switching command can indicate the panel to be switched through existing signaling or newly-added signaling.
  • the network device may directly indicate an indication of a panel that needs to be activated, or may indicate other identifiers that have a corresponding relationship with the panel, such as reference signal resources. This application does not limit this.
  • the time interval between the first time node and the second time node is greater than or equal to the panel activation time, the panel switching time, and the terminal device correctly receives The sum of the panel activation command and the duration of the terminal device correctly receiving the panel switching command.
  • the time when the terminal device correctly receives the panel activation command and the terminal device correctly receives the panel switching command can be the same, so the first time
  • the time interval between the node and the second time node can be simplified to be greater than or equal to the sum of the duration of panel activation, the duration of panel switching, and the duration of the terminal device correctly receiving the panel activation command.
  • the time interval between the first time node and the second time node can also be simplified to be greater than or equal to the panel activation time, the panel switching time, and the terminal equipment correctly receives the signal. The sum of the duration of panel activation commands.
  • the panel switching command is carried in one or more of the RRC message, MAC-CE, and DCI.
  • the existing signaling can be reused to indicate the panel that needs to be switched, so that the signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • the terminal device sends and receives signals at the second time node, including:
  • the terminal device transmits and receives signals through the beam on the activated panel at the second time node.
  • the terminal device reserves sufficient time for panel switching, so that the terminal device can complete the panel switch before the signal or channel transmission resource arrives. During the signal or channel transmission When the resource arrives, use the beam on the activated panel to send and receive signals.
  • a communication device including any one of the first aspect, the second aspect, the fifth aspect, or the seventh aspect, and the first aspect, the second aspect, the fifth aspect, or the seventh aspect Each module or unit of the method in the possible implementation mode.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the above-mentioned first, second, fifth or seventh aspects and the first, second, fifth or seventh aspects Any one of the possible implementation methods.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a communication device including any one of the third aspect, the fourth aspect, the sixth aspect, or the eighth aspect, and the third, fourth, sixth, or eighth aspect Each module or unit of the method in this possible implementation.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory, and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the above-mentioned third, fourth, sixth or eighth aspects and the third, fourth, sixth or eighth aspects. Any one of the possible implementation methods.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in a network device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any possible implementation manner of the first aspect to the eighth aspect and the first aspect to the eighth aspect Method in.
  • the foregoing processor may be a chip
  • the input circuit may be an input pin
  • the output circuit may be an output pin
  • the processing circuit may be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver
  • the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by the transmitter
  • the circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
  • a processing device including a processor and a memory.
  • the processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, receive signals through a receiver, and transmit signals through a transmitter, so as to execute any one of the first to eighth aspects and any one of the first to eighth aspects.
  • processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
  • the memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of memory and the setting mode of the memory and the processor.
  • ROM read only memory
  • sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor
  • receiving capability information may be a process of the processor receiving input capability information.
  • the processed output data may be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor may come from the receiver.
  • the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
  • the processing device in the fourteenth aspect may be a chip, and the processor may be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software
  • the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory.
  • the memory may be integrated in the processor, may be located outside the processor, and exist independently.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is run, causes the computer to execute the first aspect to The eighth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first to eighth aspects.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the first aspect to The eighth aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first to eighth aspects.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a communication system including the aforementioned network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a signal transmission method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of configuring a TCI status list, MAC-CE activation TCI status, and DCI indicating the selected TCI status through an RRC message provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of configuring a TCI state list and MAC-CE activation TC state through an RRC message provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIGS 5 and 6 are schematic diagrams of the first time slot and the first PDCCH provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of determining a reference beam provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a signal transmission method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a signal transmission method according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a signal transmission method provided by still another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a first time node and a second time node provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • WiMAX Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access
  • 5G 5th Generation
  • 5G new radio access technology
  • NR new radio access technology
  • Fig. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a communication system suitable for the sending and receiving methods and devices in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 may communicate through a wireless link.
  • Each communication device, such as the network device 110 or the terminal device 120 may be configured with multiple antennas, and the multiple antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals.
  • each communication device additionally includes a transmitter chain and a receiver chain.
  • Those of ordinary skill in the art can understand that they can all include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (such as processors, modulators, multiplexers). , Demodulator, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.). Therefore, the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 can communicate through multi-antenna technology.
  • the network device in the wireless communication system may be any device with a wireless transceiver function.
  • This equipment includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), Radio Network Controller (RNC), Node B (NB), Base Station Controller (BSC) , Base transceiver station (Base Transceiver Station, BTS), home base station (for example, Home evolved NodeB, or Home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BaseBand Unit, BBU), wireless fidelity (Wireless Fidelity, WIFI) system Access point (Access Point, AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (transmission point, TP) or transmission and reception point (transmission and reception point, TRP), etc., can also be 5G, such as NR ,
  • the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
  • the gNB may also include a radio unit (RU).
  • CU implements some functions of gNB
  • DU implements some functions of gNB, for example, CU implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC), packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions
  • DU implements wireless link
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • DU implements wireless link
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical
  • the network device may be a CU node, or a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal equipment in the wireless communication system may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, User terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device.
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, and an augmented reality (AR) terminal Equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in unmanned driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation safety ( Wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, and wireless terminals in smart homes.
  • the embodiment of this application does not limit the application scenario.
  • the beam can be understood as a spatial filter or spatial parameters.
  • the beam used to transmit a signal can be called a transmission beam (Tx beam), it can be a spatial domain transmit filter or a spatial transmit parameter (spatial transmit parameters, spatial Tx parameters); a signal used for receiving
  • the beam may be called a receive beam (reception beam, Rx beam), and may be a spatial domain receive filter (spatial domain receive filter) or a spatial receive parameter (spatial receive parameters, spatial Rx parameters).
  • the beam forming technology may be beamforming technology or other technologies.
  • the beamforming technology may specifically be a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, or a hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology.
  • the transmitting beam may refer to the distribution of signal strength in different directions in space after a signal is transmitted through the antenna, and the receiving beam may refer to the signal strength distribution of the wireless signal received from the antenna in different directions in space.
  • the beam may be a spatial filter, for example.
  • this application does not exclude the possibility of defining other terms to represent the same or similar meanings in future agreements.
  • Antenna panel referred to as panel.
  • Each antenna panel can be configured with one or more receiving beams and one or more transmitting beams. Therefore, the antenna panel can also be understood as a beam group.
  • Communication equipment such as terminal equipment or network equipment, can receive signals through the receiving beam on the antenna panel, or transmit signals through the transmitting beam on the antenna panel.
  • the panel can be distinguished by the resource of the uplink reference signal, for example.
  • the uplink reference signal may be, for example, a sounding reference signal (sounding reference, SRS).
  • SRS sounding reference
  • one antenna panel may correspond to one SRS resource set (idendifier, ID).
  • an SRS resource set ID can be used to indicate a panel.
  • network devices can be distinguished by panel ID.
  • the panel ID can be indicated by a transmission configuration indicator (TCI).
  • TCI transmission configuration indicator
  • Quasi-co-location or quasi-co-location.
  • the signals corresponding to the antenna ports with the QCL relationship have the same parameters, or the parameters of one antenna port can be used to determine the parameters of the other antenna port that has the QCL relationship with the antenna port, or the two antenna ports have the same parameters , Or, the parameter difference between the two antenna ports is less than a certain threshold.
  • the antenna port may also be abbreviated as a port, which refers to a transmitting antenna identified by a receiving end device, or a transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space.
  • a port which refers to a transmitting antenna identified by a receiving end device, or a transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space.
  • One antenna port can be configured for each virtual antenna, each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas, and each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal port.
  • the above parameters can include one or more of the following: delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average delay, average gain and space Receive parameters.
  • the spatial reception parameters may include, for example: angle of arrival (AOA), average AOA, AOA extension, angle of departure (angle of departure, AOD), average departure angle AOD, AOD extension, and receiving antenna spatial correlation parameters, Transmit antenna spatial correlation parameters, transmit beam, receive beam and resource identification.
  • the above-mentioned angles can be decomposed values of different dimensions, or a combination of decomposed values of different dimensions.
  • the above-mentioned antenna ports are antenna ports with different antenna port numbers, and/or antenna ports with the same antenna port number for information transmission or reception in different time and/or frequency and/or code domain resources, and/or Different antenna port numbers are used to transmit or receive information in different time and/or frequency and/or code domain resources.
  • the above resource identifier can be used to indicate the identifier on the resource.
  • the resource identifier may include, for example, the CSI-RS resource identifier, the SRS resource identifier, the resource identifier of the synchronization signal/synchronization signal block, the resource identifier of the preamble sequence transmitted on the physical random access channel (PRACH) or the demodulation reference Signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS).
  • PRACH physical random access channel
  • DMRS demodulation reference Signal
  • QCL relationships can be divided into the following four types based on different parameters:
  • Type A Doppler frequency shift, Doppler spread, average delay, and delay spread;
  • Type B Doppler frequency shift, Doppler spread
  • Type C Doppler frequency shift, average delay
  • Type D (type D): Space receiving parameters.
  • QCL involved in the embodiment of the present application is a type D QCL.
  • QCL can be understood as a QCL of type D, that is, a QCL defined based on spatial reception parameters.
  • the QCL relationship between the port of the downstream signal and the port of the downstream signal, or the port of the upstream signal and the port of the upstream signal can be that the two signals have the same AOA or AOD , Used to indicate the same receive beam or transmit beam.
  • the AOA and AOD of the two signals may have a corresponding relationship, or the AOD and AOA of the two signals may have a corresponding relationship, that is, the beam can be used Reciprocity, the uplink transmission beam is determined according to the downlink reception beam, or the downlink reception beam is determined according to the uplink transmission beam.
  • the signal transmitted on the port with the spatial QCL relationship may also have a corresponding beam, and the corresponding beam includes at least one of the following: the same receiving beam, the same transmitting beam, and the transmitting beam corresponding to the receiving beam (corresponding to the reciprocal Scene), the receiving beam corresponding to the transmitting beam (corresponding to the scene with reciprocity).
  • the signal transmitted on the port with the spatial QCL relationship can also be understood as using the same spatial filter to receive or transmit the signal.
  • the spatial filter may be at least one of the following: precoding, weight of the antenna port, phase deflection of the antenna port, and amplitude gain of the antenna port.
  • the signal transmitted on the port with the spatial QCL relationship can also be understood as having a corresponding beam pair link (BPL), and the corresponding BPL includes at least one of the following: the same downlink BPL, the same uplink BPL, and the downlink BPL The corresponding uplink BPL, the downlink BPL corresponding to the uplink BPL.
  • BPL beam pair link
  • the spatial reception parameter (ie, QCL of type D) can be understood as a parameter for indicating the direction information of the reception beam.
  • the beam pairing relationship that is, the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam, can also be referred to as the pairing relationship between the spatial transmitting filter and the spatial receiving filter.
  • a larger beamforming gain can be obtained by transmitting signals between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam with a beam pairing relationship.
  • the transmitting end may send the reference signal through beam scanning, and the receiving end may also receive the reference signal through beam scanning.
  • the transmitting end can form beams with different directivities in space by beamforming, and can poll on multiple beams with different directivities to transmit reference signals through beams with different directivities, so that The power of the reference signal transmitted in the direction of the transmission beam can reach the maximum.
  • the receiving end can also form beams with different directivities in space through beamforming, and can poll on multiple beams with different directivities to receive reference signals through beams with different directivities, so that the receiving end can receive The power of the reference signal can reach the maximum in the direction in which the receiving beam points.
  • the receiving end can perform channel measurement based on the received reference signal, and report the measurement result to the transmitting end through CSI.
  • the receiving end can report a part of the reference signal resource with a larger reference signal receiving power (RSRP) to the sending end, such as reporting the identification of the reference signal resource, so that the sending end can use the channel when transmitting data or signaling Better quality beam pairing relationship to send and receive signals.
  • RSRP reference signal receiving power
  • Reference signals and reference signal resources can be used for channel measurement, channel estimation, or beam quality monitoring.
  • the reference signal resource can be used to configure the transmission attributes of the reference signal, for example, the position of the time-frequency resource, the port mapping relationship, the power factor, and the scrambling code. For details, refer to the prior art.
  • the transmitting end device may send the reference signal based on the reference signal resource, and the receiving end device may receive the reference signal based on the reference signal resource.
  • the reference signal involved in the embodiment of the present application may include, for example, a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), a synchronization signal block (SSB), and a sounding reference signal (SRS).
  • the reference signal resources may include CSI-RS resources (CSI-RS resources), SSB resources, and SRS resources (SRS resources).
  • each reference signal resource may correspond to an identifier of a reference signal resource.
  • CSI-RS resource indicator CSI-RS resource indicator, CRI
  • SSB resource indicator SSB resource indicator, SSBRI
  • SRS resource index SRI
  • SSB resources can also be understood as synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (SS/PBCH block) resources.
  • SSB resource and SS/PBCH block resource may have the same meaning, and SSB resource and SS/PBCH block resource may have the same meaning.
  • SSB may also refer to SSB resources. Therefore, the SSB resource identifier may sometimes be referred to as an SSB identifier (SSB index).
  • time domain behavior time domain behavior parameters
  • the time domain behavior may include periodic (periodic), semi-persistent (SP), and aperiodic (AP), for example.
  • CSI-RS may include: periodic CSI-RS, aperiodic CSI-RS and semi-persistent CSI-RS.
  • SRS may also include: periodic SRS, aperiodic SRS, and semi-persistent SRS.
  • Transmission configuration indication (TCI) status can be used to indicate the QCL relationship between two reference signals.
  • the TCI state can be used by the terminal equipment to determine the receiving beam of the downlink signal or downlink channel.
  • Each TCI state may include a reference signal resource identifier.
  • the reference signal resource identifier may be, for example, at least one of the following: non-zero power (non-zero power, NZP) channel state information (channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS) resource identifier (NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId) Or SSB index (SSB-Index).
  • the reference signal resource identifier in each TCI state indicates the reference signal resource used in the beam training process.
  • network devices can send reference signals through different transmit beams based on different reference signal resources, so reference signals sent through different transmit beams can be associated with different reference signal resources; terminal devices can be based on different references
  • the signal resource receives the reference signal through different receiving beams, so the reference signals received through different receiving beams can also be associated with different reference signal resources. Therefore, in the beam training process, the terminal device can maintain the corresponding relationship between the reference signal resource identifier and the receiving beam, and the network device can maintain the corresponding relationship between the reference signal resource identifier and the transmitting beam. With reference to the signal resource identifier, the pairing relationship between the receiving beam and the transmitting beam can be established.
  • the terminal device may determine the receiving beam based on the TCI state indicated by the network device, and the network device may determine the transmitting beam based on the same TCI state.
  • the TCI status may also include the serving cell index (ServeCellIndex), the bandwidth part (bandwidth part, BWP) identifier (identifier, ID), etc. Since the embodiment of the present application does not involve the serving cell and the BWP, a detailed description is not provided here.
  • Spatial relation It can also be called uplink TCI (uplink TCI, UL TCI). Similar to the TCI introduced above, the spatial relationship can be used for the terminal device to determine the transmit beam of the uplink signal or uplink channel.
  • Each spatial relationship may include a reference signal resource identification.
  • the reference signal resource identifier can be, for example, any one of the following: SSB index (SSB-Index), non-zero power CSI-RS reference signal resource identifier (NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId), and SRS resource identifier (SRS-ResourceId) .
  • the reference signal resource identifier refers to the reference signal resource used in the beam training process.
  • a spatial relationship is used to determine a transmission beam.
  • the terminal device may maintain the corresponding relationship between the reference signal resource identifier and the transmitting beam during the beam training process, and the network device may maintain the corresponding relationship between the reference signal resource identifier and the receiving beam during the beam training process.
  • the pairing relationship between the transmitting beam and the receiving beam can be established.
  • the terminal device may determine the transmitting beam based on the spatial relationship indicated by the network device, and the network device may determine the receiving beam based on the same spatial relationship.
  • each spatial relationship may also include power control information.
  • the power control information may include, for example, at least one of the following: expected received power, path loss reference signal, and path loss compensation parameter ⁇ .
  • the terminal device can determine what transmission power to use to transmit the uplink signal based on the power control information.
  • the spatial relationship may also include the serving cell index (ServeCellIndex), the bandwidth part (bandwidth part, BWP) identifier (identifier, ID), etc. Since the embodiment of the present application does not involve the serving cell and the BWP, a detailed description is not provided here.
  • Serving CellIndex serving cell index
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • ID bandwidth part
  • the network device When the network device schedules resources for the terminal device for signal transmission through the scheduling signaling, it may indicate the receiving beam or the transmitting beam of the terminal device through the scheduling signaling.
  • the terminal device can determine whether panel switching is required according to the receiving beam or the transmitting beam indicated in the scheduling signaling. However, it takes 2 to 3 milliseconds (ms) for the terminal device to switch the panel.
  • ms milliseconds
  • the panel that needs to be switched on the terminal device is probably still in a deactivated state, and needs to be activated before switching. The time required to activate the panel may be much greater than the time to switch the panel.
  • the interval between the time when the network device sends the scheduling signaling and the time of the scheduled resource may not be sufficient for the terminal device to complete panel activation and switching. If the resource scheduled by the network device has arrived before the panel switching of the terminal device is completed, the signal transmitted on the resource cannot be received or sent in time.
  • the transmit beam on the panel cannot be used to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel. Therefore, the scheduled resources may be wasted, and the uplink transmission may require more resources to be scheduled due to insufficient resources, resulting in a larger transmission delay.
  • the resource is used for downlink transmission, since the terminal device will not be able to complete the panel switching in the future, the receiving beam on the panel cannot be used to receive the downlink signal or the downlink channel. Therefore, the downlink signal or downlink channel transmitted on the scheduled resource may not be completely received, and it may be necessary to achieve the successful reception of the downlink signal or downlink channel by means such as retransmission, resulting in a larger transmission delay. , And the utilization rate of resources is low.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation, thereby helping to improve the transmission performance of the system.
  • panel activation and panel switching are collectively referred to as panel switching, and the delay of panel activation and panel switching is recorded as the delay of panel switching. This application does not exclude this understanding.
  • the embodiments shown below are for ease of understanding only, and the panel activation and panel switching are described as two separate concepts. It should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • "indication” may include direct indication and indirect indication, and may also include explicit indication and implicit indication.
  • the information indicated by a certain piece of information (configuration information as described below) is called information to be instructed.
  • information to be instructed In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated. For example, but not limited to, you can directly indicate the information to be instructed.
  • Information such as the information to be indicated or the index of the information to be indicated.
  • the information to be indicated can also be indicated indirectly by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, and other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, it is also possible to realize the indication of specific information by means of the pre-arranged order (for example, stipulated in the agreement) of various information, thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent.
  • line control information DCI
  • medium access control control element MAC-CE
  • radio resource control RRC
  • physical downlink control channel physical downlink control channel
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • PDSCH physical uplink control channel
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • PUSCH physical uplink share channel
  • control resources Set control resource set, CORESET
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • SS/PBCH synchronization signal block
  • TCI transmission configuration indication
  • the first, second, and various numerical numbers are only for easy distinction for description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, distinguish different indication information, different beams, and different panels.
  • pre-acquisition may include being indicated by network device signaling or pre-defined, for example, protocol definition.
  • pre-defined can be realized by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate related information in the equipment (for example, including terminal equipment and network equipment). This application does not make any specific implementation methods. limited.
  • the "saving" involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to storing in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in the decoder, processor, or communication device.
  • the type of the memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, both A and B exist, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are in an "or” relationship.
  • "The following at least one item (a)” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or plural items (a).
  • At least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or b, or c, or a and b, or a and c, or b and c, or a, b and c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple.
  • the resource arrival of the signal or channel mentioned in the embodiment of this application can specifically refer to the time when the signal or channel starts to be sent, or the time when the signal or channel starts to receive.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be applied to a wireless communication system, for example, the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1.
  • a wireless communication connection relationship between two communication devices in the wireless communication system may correspond to the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1, for example, as shown in FIG.
  • the terminal device shown may also be a chip configured in the terminal device; the other communication device of the two communication devices may correspond to the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1, for example, it may be the chip shown in FIG.
  • the network device may also be a chip configured in the network device.
  • the interaction process between the terminal device and the network device is taken as an example to describe in detail the signal transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the following and upper behavior examples will be used to illustrate the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application respectively.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a signal transmission method 200 provided by an embodiment of the present application from the perspective of device interaction. Specifically, FIG. 2 specifically shows a transmission method of a downlink signal or a downlink channel. As shown in the figure, the method 200 shown in FIG. 2 may include step 210 to step 240. The method 200 will be described in detail below in conjunction with the drawings.
  • the terminal device determines a first beam for receiving a downlink signal or a downlink channel, and the first beam is a beam on a currently activated panel.
  • the first beam determined by the terminal device for receiving a downlink signal or a downlink channel is denoted as the first receiving beam hereinafter.
  • the first receiving beam may be a beam on the currently activated panel.
  • the first receiving beam may be one beam or multiple beams. This application does not limit the number of beams included in the first receiving beam.
  • the currently activated panel specifically refers to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the currently activated panel can be one panel or multiple panels. This application does not limit the number of currently activated panels.
  • the multiple beams may be beams on one panel that is currently activated, or beams on multiple panels that are currently activated.
  • the currently activated panel may refer to the currently powered-on panel.
  • a deactivated panel may refer to a panel that is powered off. If you want to switch the panel, you first need to ensure that the panel is activated, in other words, powered on.
  • the first receiving beam may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be determined by the terminal device itself.
  • the specific process of determining the first receiving beam by the terminal device will be described in detail below in combination with these two different methods.
  • the terminal device determines the first receiving beam according to the first indication information sent by the network device.
  • the method further includes step 220: the terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first receiving beam.
  • the network device sends the first indication information to the terminal device.
  • the network device may indicate the first receiving beam to the terminal device in an implicit or explicit manner.
  • the first indication information may be a newly added field of existing signaling, or may reuse existing fields in existing signaling, or may be carried by newly added signaling. This application does not limit this.
  • the first indication information is carried in one or more of DCI, MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the network device can indicate the first receiving beam through one of the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages, or through a combination of two or three of the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages.
  • the first receive beam can indicate the first receiving beam through one of the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages, or through a combination of two or three of the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages.
  • the network device instructs the first receiving beam through a combination of two or three items in the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages, it only needs to ensure that one of the two or three items in the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages is combined. If at least one of the determined beams is on the activated panel of the terminal device, it can be ensured that the first receiving beam indicated by the first indication information is on the activated panel of the terminal device.
  • step 210 specifically includes: the terminal device determines a first receiving beam for receiving a downlink signal or a downlink channel according to the first indication information.
  • the specific method for the network device to indicate the first receiving beam through the first indication information and the specific method for the terminal device to determine the first receiving beam according to the first indication information will be described in detail below in conjunction with the transmission of specific downlink signals or downlink channels. It should be understood that the signaling shown below is only an example and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of using other signaling to indicate the first receiving beam.
  • the QCL types indicated in the TCI state and the spatial relationship are all Type D.
  • both the TCI state and the spatial relationship are used to determine the spatial relationship.
  • the terminal device may determine the receiving beam according to the TCI state; the terminal device may determine the transmitting beam according to the spatial relationship.
  • the downlink channel is a physical downlink share channel (PDSCH), and the first indication information is carried in DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages.
  • PDSCH physical downlink share channel
  • the DCI may be, for example, DCI used for scheduling PDSCH, or DCI used for other purposes, which is not limited in this application.
  • the DCI may include a transmission configuration indication (TCI), the TCI may indicate a selected TCI state, and the TCI state may be used to determine one or more receive beams.
  • TCI transmission configuration indication
  • one or more receiving beams determined by the selected TCI state indicated by the TCI are the first receiving beams and can be used to receive the PDSCH.
  • the first receiving beam is the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the network device may schedule the PDSCH for the terminal device through the DCI of the format 1_1 (format 1_1) (which may be referred to as DCI format 1_1).
  • DCI format 1_1 which may be referred to as DCI format 1_1
  • the terminal device may determine the first receiving beam based on the foregoing first indication information.
  • the above DCI format 1_1 and the first indication information may be the same signaling, or may be different signaling. This application does not limit this.
  • the aforementioned selected TCI state may be one of one or more TCI states activated by the network device through MAC-CE in advance.
  • the network device can activate up to 8 TCI states for each bandwidth part (BWP) in each cell.
  • the ID of the TCI state indicated in the above DCI may be, for example, a relative ID in one or more TCI states activated by the MAC-CE.
  • the network device can activate up to 8 TCI states through the MAC-CE, and the network device can indicate the selected TCI state through 3 bits in the DCI. Compared with directly indicating the selected TCI state from the TCI state list, the bit overhead can be reduced.
  • the same or similar situations are not illustrated by examples.
  • each activated TCI state can be used to determine one or more receive beams.
  • the network device may determine the activated TCI state according to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the receiving beam determined by one or more activated TCI states may be a beam on a panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the receiving beam determined by any activated TCI state may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the one or more TCI states activated by the MAC-CE may be the TCI state in the TCI state list configured by the network device for the terminal device through the RRC message in advance.
  • the network device can configure the TCI state list for the terminal device through the TCI state addition mode list (tci-StatesToAddModList) in the RRC message.
  • the TCI state list may include one or more TCI states.
  • the network device can configure a maximum of 64 TCI states for each BWP in each cell.
  • One or more TCI states activated by MAC-CE can be understood as a subset of the TCI state list.
  • the network device can configure each TCI state in the TCI state list through the RRC message. For example, the reference signal resource identifier, QCL type, etc. in each TCI state.
  • the terminal device determines the selected TCI state, it can determine the beam to be received according to the TCI state configured in the RRC message.
  • each TCI state in the TCI state list can be used to determine one or more receive beams.
  • the network device may determine the TCI state in the TCI state list according to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the receiving beam determined by each TCI state in the TCI state list may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the receiving beam determined by any TCI state in the TCI state list may be a beam on a panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the network device determines and instructs the first receiving beam for the terminal device, it only needs to ensure that there is at least one of the TCI status list configured by the RRC message, the TCI status activated by the MAC-CE, and the TCI status indicated by the DCI. If the determined beam is on the activated panel of the terminal device, it can be ensured that the first receiving beam used by the terminal device to receive the PDSCH is on the activated panel.
  • Figure 3 shows a schematic diagram of configuring the TCI status list through the RRC message, the MAC-CE activation TCI status, and the DCI indicating the selected TCI status.
  • each reference signal (RS) resource identifier (RS 0-0 to RS 0-63 and RS 1-0 to RS 1-63 as shown in the figure) can correspond to a TCI state. It is also possible to determine one or more beams. Each panel shown in FIG. 3 distinguishes different beams through different reference signal resources.
  • the beams corresponding to all TCI states in the TCI state list configured through the RRC message may be all or part of the beams on the active panel.
  • the TCI state activated by MAC-CE is a subset of the TCI state list configured by the RRC message.
  • the beams determined by the activated TCI state may also be beams on the activated panel.
  • the beam determined by the TCI state indicated by the TCI in the DCI is the beam on the active panel.
  • the reference signal resource identifiers and TCI status identifiers in the figure are examples for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. It should be noted that when the TCI state list configured in the RRC message only includes one TCI state, the terminal device may directly determine the first receiving beam according to the TCI state configured in the RRC message. There is no need for the network device to activate part of the TCI status in the TCI status list through the MAC-CE and indicate the selected TCI status through the DCI. In this case, the aforementioned first indication information may only be carried in the RRC message.
  • the terminal device can directly determine the active TCI state based on the TCI state configured in the RRC message, and then determine the selected TCI based on the DCI status. There is no need for the network device to activate part of the TCI state in the TCI state list through the MAC-CE. In this case, the foregoing first indication information may be carried in the DCI and RRC messages.
  • the terminal device can determine the first receiving beam according to the activated TCI state of the MAC-CE. There is no need for the network device to indicate the selected TCI state through DCI.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information may be carried in MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the network device can still indicate the first receiving beam through the RRC message, MAC-CE, and DCI in sequence.
  • the downlink channel is a physical downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH), and the first indication information is carried in the MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • the MAC-CE can be used to activate a TCI state, and the activated TCI state is used to determine one or more receive beams.
  • the one or more receiving beams determined by the activated TCI state of the MAC-CE are the first receiving beams and can be used to receive the PDCCH.
  • the first receiving beam is the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the above-mentioned TCI state activated by the MAC-CE may be the TCI state in the TCI state list configured by the network device for the terminal device in advance through the RRC message. Since the process of configuring the TCI state list through the RRC message has been described in detail in the above embodiment, for the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
  • the network device may determine the TCI state in the TCI state list according to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the receiving beam determined by each TCI state in the TCI state list may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the receiving beam determined by any TCI state in the TCI state list may be a beam on a panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the network device determines and instructs the first receiving beam for the terminal device, it only needs to ensure that at least one of the TCI status list configured by the RRC message and the TCI status activated by the MAC-CE is in the terminal. On the activated panel of the device, it can be ensured that the first receiving beam used by the terminal device to receive the PDCCH is on the activated panel.
  • Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of configuring a TCI state list through an RRC message and the MAC-CE activation TCI state.
  • each reference signal resource identifier can correspond to a TCI state, that is, one or more beams can be determined.
  • Each panel shown in FIG. 4 distinguishes different beams through different reference signal resource identifiers. All beams corresponding to the TCI state in the TCI state list configured by the network device through the RRC message may be all or part of the beams on the activated panel.
  • the TCI state activated by the network device through the MAC-CE is a subset of the TCI state list configured by the RRC message.
  • the beam determined by the activated TCI state is the beam on the activated panel.
  • the TCI state included in the TCI state list is used to determine the TCI state of the first receive beam.
  • the network device can directly indicate the first receiving beam through the RRC message, and does not need to activate a TCI state in the TCI state list through the MAC-CE. That is, the first indication information may only be carried in the RRC message.
  • the downlink signal is an aperiodic CSI-RS
  • the first indication information is carried in DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages.
  • the DCI may be DCI used to trigger aperiodic CSI-RS transmission, or DCI used for other purposes. This application does not limit this.
  • the DCI may include an indication of a selected NZP-CSI-RS resource set (NZP-CSI-RS resource set), and the selected NZP-CSI-RS resource set includes one or more NZP-CSI-RS resources (NZP-CSI-RS resource). Since each NZP-CSI-RS resource corresponds to a TCI state, each NZP-CSI-RS resource can be used to determine one or more receive beams. Therefore, the selected NZP-CSI-RS resource set indicated in the DCI can be used to determine one or more receive beams.
  • the receiving beam determined by the selected NZP-CSI-RS resource set indicated by the DCI is the first receiving beam, which can be used to receive aperiodic CSI-RS. And the first receiving beam is the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the correspondence between the NZP-CSI-RS resource and the TCI state can be pre-configured, such as protocol definition, or the network device can be pre-configured through signaling.
  • the network device can trigger the transmission of aperiodic CSI-RS through DCI.
  • the terminal device may determine the first receiving beam based on the foregoing first indication information.
  • the DCI used to trigger the transmission of aperiodic CSI-RS and the DCI carrying the first indication information may be the same DCI or different DCIs. This application does not limit this.
  • the aforementioned selected NZP-CSI-RS resource set may be one of one or more NZP-CSI-RS resource sets activated by the network device through MAC-CE in advance.
  • the ID of the NZP-CSI-RS resource set indicated in the above DCI may be, for example, the relative ID of one or more NZP-CSI-RS resource sets activated by the MAC-CE.
  • each activated NZP-CSI-RS resource set can be used to determine one or more receive beams.
  • the network device may determine the activated NZP-CSI-RS resource set according to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the receiving beam determined by one or more activated NZP-CSI-RS resource sets may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the receiving beam determined by any activated NZP-CSI-RS resource set may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the one or more NZP-CSI-RS resource sets activated above may be a subset of one or more NZP-CSI-RS resource sets configured by the network device for the terminal device in advance through an RRC message.
  • the network device can pre-configure one or more NZP-CSI-RS resource sets for the terminal device through the RRC message, and can configure the corresponding TCI state in each NZP-CSI-RS resource set. Therefore, after the terminal device determines the selected NZP-CSI-RS resource set, it can determine the receiving beam according to the TCI state corresponding to the NZP-CSI-RS resource set configured in the RRC message.
  • the network device may configure the CSI-Aperiodic Trigger State List (CSI-Aperiodic Trigger State List) for the terminal device through the RRC message.
  • the CSI-aperiodic trigger state list may include one or more NZP-CSI-RS resource sets. Each NZP-CSI-RS resource set may include one or more NZP-CSI-RS resources, and each NZP-CSI-RS resource may correspond to a TCI state.
  • the network device may also configure the TCI state corresponding to each NZP-CSI-RS resource in the CSI-aperiodic trigger state list through the RRC message. Therefore, the CSI-aperiodic trigger state list configured by the network device can be used to determine one or more receive beams.
  • the network device may determine the NZP-CSI-RS resource set configured for the terminal device according to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the receiving beam determined by each NZP-CSI-RS resource set in one or more NZP-CSI-RS resource sets configured by the RRC message may be a beam on a panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the receiving beam determined by any NZP-CSI-RS resource set configured by the RRC message may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the network device determines and instructs the first receiving beam for the terminal device, it only needs to ensure that the CSI-aperiodic trigger status list configured by the RRC message, the NZP-CSI-RS resource set activated by the MAC-CE and If at least one of the determined beams in the NZP-CSI-RS resource set indicated by the DCI is on the activated panel of the terminal device, it can be guaranteed that the first receiving beam used by the terminal device to receive aperiodic CSI-RS is on the activated panel .
  • the process of configuring the TCI status in the RRC message, the MAC-CE activation TCI status, and the DCI indicating the selected TCI status since the above has been schematically illustrated in conjunction with FIG. 3, the process of configuring the TCI status in the RRC message, the MAC-CE activation TCI status, and the DCI indicating the selected TCI status.
  • the network device configures the correspondence between the NZP-CSI-RS resource set and the TCI state through the RRC message, the MAC-CE activates the NZP-CSI-RS resource set and the process of DCI indicating the NZP-CSI-RS resource set is similar.
  • the drawings are not described here.
  • the terminal device can directly determine the first reception according to the NZP-CSI-RS resource set configured in the RRC message
  • the beam does not need to indicate the selected NZP-CSI-RS resource set through MAC-CE and DCI.
  • the aforementioned first indication information may only be carried in the RRC message.
  • the terminal device can directly determine the first receiving beam according to the NZP-CSI-RS activated in the MAC-CE.
  • the DCI needs to be used to indicate the selected NZP-CSI-RS resource set.
  • the foregoing first indication information may be carried in MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the downlink signal is a semi-persistent (SP) CSI-RS
  • the first indication information is carried in MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the MAC-CE may include an indication of the TCI status.
  • the indication of the TCI status may be, for example, an identifier (ID) of the TCI status.
  • ID an identifier
  • the TCI status indicated in the MAC-CE can be used to determine one or more receive beams.
  • one or more receiving beams determined by the TCI status indicated by the MAC-CE are the first receiving beams, which can be used to receive semi-persistent CSI-RS.
  • the first receiving beam is the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the network device can activate semi-persistent CSI-RS transmission through MAC-CE.
  • the terminal device may determine the first indication based on the first indication information.
  • the MAC-CE that activates the transmission of the semi-persistent CSI-RS and the MAC-CE carrying the first indication information may be the same signaling or different signaling, which is not limited in this application.
  • the network device can configure one or more TCI states through RRC messages.
  • the TCI state indicated in the above MAC-CE may be a subset of one or more TCI states configured by the RRC message.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device determines the TCI state used to determine the first receive beam, it can determine the first receive beam according to the TCI state configured in the RRC message.
  • the network device determines and instructs the first receiving beam for the terminal device, it only needs to ensure that at least one of the TCI status configured by the RRC message and the TCI status indicated in the MAC-CE is in the terminal.
  • the activated panel of the device it can be ensured that the first receiving beam used by the terminal device to receive the semi-persistent CSI-RS is on the activated panel.
  • the downlink signal is a periodic CSI-RS
  • the first indication information is carried in an RRC message.
  • the RRC message may configure one or more NZP-CSI-RS resource sets and the TCI state corresponding to each NZP-CSI-RS resource set for the terminal device. Since each TCI state can be used to determine one or more receive beams, one or more NZP-CSI-RS resource sets configured in the RRC message can be used to determine one or more receive beams.
  • one or more receiving beams determined by one or more NZP-CSI-RS resource sets configured by the RRC message are the first receiving beams and can be used to receive periodic CSI-RS. And the first receiving beam is the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the specific method for the network equipment to indicate the first receiving beam through the first indication information and the specific method for the terminal equipment to determine the first receiving beam according to the first indication information is described in detail in conjunction with the transmission of the downlink signal or the downlink channel.
  • the embodiments listed above are only examples, and this application does not limit the types of downlink signals and downlink channels, and this application does not limit the specific methods for scheduling or triggering transmission of downlink signals or downlink channels.
  • the terminal device may determine the first receiving beam by itself.
  • step 210 specifically includes: the terminal device determines a default beam according to the currently activated panel, and uses the default beam as the first receiving beam for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels.
  • the default beam refers to beams satisfying preset conditions on one or more panels currently activated.
  • the terminal device can search for a beam that meets a preset condition from one or more panels currently activated as the default beam.
  • the preset condition may be predefined, such as a protocol definition.
  • the network device and the terminal device can determine the default beam according to the pre-defined preset conditions and the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the default beam refers to the beam that meets the preset conditions on one or more panels that are currently activated. Specifically, it can mean that the default beam can have the same beams that meet the preset conditions on one or more panels that are currently activated.
  • Space receiving parameters For the specific parameters included in the space receiving parameter, please refer to the above list. For brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the beam referenced by the default beam is recorded as the reference beam.
  • the reference beam is the beam that meets the preset conditions on the currently activated panel described above.
  • the default beam can be a reference beam or a beam determined based on the reference beam. This application does not limit this.
  • the default beam refers to the receive beam of the first PDCCH used in the first time slot
  • the receive beam of the first PDCCH is the receive beam on the currently activated panel with the smallest ID ID of one or more control resources.
  • the receiving beam corresponding to the control resource set, and the one or more control resource sets are the control resource sets monitored by the terminal device in the first time slot; the first time slot is the distance in the one or more time slots With reference to the nearest time slot of the time slot, each of the one or more time slots is configured with one or more control resource sets, and in each of the one or more time slots In the configured one or more resource sets, at least one receiving beam of the control resource set is on the currently activated panel. .
  • the preset condition that the reference beam satisfies includes: being in the first time slot and being a beam for receiving the first PDCCH.
  • the reference time slot may refer to the time slot where the transmission resource of the signal or channel scheduled or triggered by the network device is located.
  • the reference time slot may be, for example, a time slot where a physical downlink control channel is located, or a time slot where a physical downlink shared channel is located, or a downlink reference signal (such as a channel state information reference signal, CSI-RS)) time slot where the transmission resource is located, etc.
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • the first time slot and the reference time slot may be different time slots or the same time slot. This application does not limit this.
  • the first time slot satisfies: condition a) the first time slot contains one or more control resource sets detected by the terminal device; condition b) the one or more control resource sets in the first time slot are at least There is a receiving beam that controls the resource set on the currently activated panel; condition c) the first time slot is the distance reference time from the scheduled resource in one or more time slots that meet the above conditions a) and b) The nearest time slot.
  • the first PDCCH satisfies: condition a) that the receiving beam is on the currently activated panel; condition b) the PDCCH transmitted by the resource set with the smallest ID in one or more control resource sets monitored by the terminal device in the first time slot.
  • the first PDCCH can be determined, and then the receiving beam of the first PDCCH can be determined.
  • Figures 5 and 6 are schematic diagrams of the first time slot and the first PDCCH provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Time slot 0 is configured with control resource set #1
  • time slot 1 is configured with control resource set #2
  • time slot 2 is not configured with control resource set
  • time slot 3 is configured with resources for signal or channel transmission.
  • the resource may be a resource scheduled by a network device for transmitting a downlink signal or a downlink channel.
  • the receiving beam of control resource set #1 in time slot 0 is on panel 0, and the receiving beam of control resource set #2 in time slot 1 is on panel 1.
  • time slot 1 shown in FIG. 5 is the first time slot.
  • the PDCCH transmitted in the control resource set #2 in this time slot 1 is the first PDCCH.
  • the terminal device may determine the beam receiving the first PDCCH on the panel 1 as the reference beam, and may further determine the default beam according to the reference beam, and determine the default beam as the first receiving beam.
  • the beam used to receive the first PDCCH may be used as the default beam, or the default beam may be determined according to the spatial reception parameters of the beam used to receive the first PDCCH .
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the default beam according to the reference beam can refer to the prior art. For brevity, detailed description of the specific method is omitted here.
  • time slot 1 can be excluded. At this time, time slot 0 is closest to the resource scheduled by the network device for transmitting signals or channels, then time slot 0 shown in Figure 5 is the first time slot; the time slot 0 in the control resource set #1 is transmitted
  • the PDCCH is the first PDCCH.
  • the terminal device may determine the beam receiving the first PDCCH on panel 0 as the reference beam, and may further determine the default beam according to the reference beam, and determine the default beam as the first receiving beam.
  • time slot 0 is configured with control resource set #1
  • time slot 1 is configured with control resource set #2 and control resource set #3
  • time slot 2 is not configured with control resource set
  • time slot 3 is configured for transmission Signal or channel resources.
  • the resource may be a resource scheduled by a network device for transmitting a downlink signal or a downlink channel.
  • the receiving beam of control resource set #1 in time slot 0 is on panel 0
  • the receiving beam of control resource set #2 in time slot 1 is on panel 1
  • the receiving beam of control resource #3 is on panel 0.
  • time slot 1 shown in FIG. 6 is the first time slot.
  • the ID of the control resource set #2 is smaller than the ID of the control resource set #3, the PCCCH transmitted by the control resource set #2 is the first PDCCH.
  • the terminal device may determine the beam receiving the first PDCCH on the panel 1 as the reference beam, and may further determine the default beam according to the reference beam, and determine the default beam as the first receiving beam.
  • time slot 1 shown in FIG. 6 is the first time slot.
  • the PDCCH transmitted in the control resource set #3 is the first One PDCCH.
  • the terminal device may determine the beam receiving the first PDCCH on panel 0 as the reference beam, and may further determine the default beam according to the reference beam, and determine the default beam as the first receiving beam.
  • the default beam refers to the currently activated N (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) panel of the beams used to receive the synchronization signal block determined by the random access process, the nearest M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N, and M is an integer) L (1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and L is an integer) beams used for receiving the sub-synchronization signal block.
  • L may be 1, or N, or M.
  • the default beam can refer to at least one of i, ii, and iii listed below.
  • the one beam used for the reception of the synchronization signal block closest to the reference time slot is 1, and M is 1.
  • the beam used for receiving the synchronization signal block closest to the reference time slot on each panel That is, a total of N beams.
  • L is N
  • M is N.
  • the beam used for the reception of the N synchronization signal blocks closest to the reference time slot that is, A total of L beams.
  • 1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and M is N.
  • the three examples of beams that can be referred to by the default beam listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the N times closest to the reference time slot can also be replaced with M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of determining a reference beam provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • N the number of currently activated panels
  • the N activated panels include panel 0, panel 1, panel 2, and panel 3.
  • Time beam on the panel 4 according to the distance signal transmission or resources for channel spacing ascending order were: t 5 on the panel 1 for receiving a time synchronization signal block beam, t the time panel 4 0 means for receiving the synchronization signal block beam, t 3 for receiving a time synchronization signal beam on the panel 2 blocks, t the time the beam 2 for receiving a synchronization signal block on the panel 3, t 1 for receiving a time synchronization signal panel 0
  • the reference beam is the beam used for the most recent reception of the synchronization signal block among the 4 panels, which is determined by the random access procedure at time t 5 and used for receiving synchronization on panel 1 The beam of the signal block. Then the default beam can refer to the beam used to receive the synchronization signal block on panel 1 at time t 5 determined by the random access procedure.
  • the default beam of each of the four panels refers to the reference beam on the respective panel.
  • the reference beam on each panel is determined by the random access procedure, and is the beam used to receive the synchronization signal block last time.
  • the beams used for the latest synchronization signal block reception determined by the random access process on each of the four panels are: the beam used to receive the synchronization signal block on panel 0 at time t 1, and panel 1 at time t 5 a block for receiving a synchronization signal beam, t 2 time block for receiving a synchronization signal beam on the panel 2, t 3 beams for receiving a time synchronization signal block panel 3.
  • the default beams on each of the 4 panels can refer to the above 4 beams respectively.
  • the reference beam is the beam used for receiving the last 4 synchronization signal blocks determined by the random access procedure among the 4 panels.
  • the beams used for the last 4 synchronization signal block receptions determined by the random access process are: the beam used for receiving the synchronization signal block on panel 1 at time t 5 , and the beam used for receiving synchronization signal block at time t 4 on panel 1 reception beam signal sync blocks, t 3 for receiving a time synchronization signal beam in the panel block 3, t the time the beam 2 for receiving a synchronization signal on the panel 2 blocks.
  • the default beam can refer to the above 3 beams.
  • FIG. 7 is only an example for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the number of currently activated panels of the terminal device, the number of beams on each panel, and the order in which each panel receives synchronization signal blocks.
  • the default beam refers to the L beams used for receiving synchronization signal blocks determined by the initial access process on the currently activated N panels, and the L used for receiving the M synchronization signal blocks closest to the reference time slot. Beam.
  • the default beam can refer to at least one of i, ii, and iii listed below.
  • the beam used for receiving the synchronization signal block closest to the reference time slot on each panel That is, a total of N beams;
  • the beam used for the reception of the N synchronization signal blocks closest to the reference time slot that is, A total of L beams.
  • the three examples of beams that can be referred to by the default beam listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the N times closest to the reference time slot can also be replaced with M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • the default beam refers to the most recent M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N, and M is an integer) synchronization signal among the currently activated N (N ⁇ 1 and integer) panels used to receive synchronization signal blocks.
  • the default beam is used for receiving synchronization when referring to the L beams used for receiving the M synchronization signal blocks closest to the reference time slot among the beams used to receive the synchronization signal block on the currently activated N panels.
  • the beam of the signal block is not necessarily determined by the random access process or the initial access process, but may also be determined by other methods. This embodiment does not limit this.
  • the default beam refers to the beam used for sending the physical uplink control channel with the smallest ID among the physical uplink control channels on the currently activated N panels in the activated uplink BWP.
  • the beam referenced by the default beam can satisfy: 1) on the currently activated N panels; 2) used to send the physical uplink control channel with the smallest ID in the activated uplink BWP.
  • the ID of the physical uplink control channel may specifically refer to the ID of the physical uplink control channel resource (PUCCH resource), or may refer to the ID of the physical uplink control channel resource set (PUCCH resource set).
  • the physical uplink control channel with the smallest ID may refer to the physical uplink control channel resource with the smallest ID, or the physical uplink control channel resource set with the smallest ID.
  • the terminal device may determine the physical uplink control channel resource with the smallest ID according to the ID of the physical uplink control channel resource configured for the activated uplink BWP.
  • the transmit beam can be determined as the reference beam; when the physical uplink control channel with the smallest ID
  • the transmit beam of the physical uplink control channel is currently activated. The beam position on the panel.
  • the default beam refers to the beam used for transmission of the physical uplink control channel with the smallest ID among the physical uplink control channels on the currently activated N panels.
  • the beam referenced by the default beam is not limited to the beam used to transmit the physical uplink control channel in the activated uplink BWP, and may also be the beam used to transmit the physical uplink control channel in the inactive uplink BWP.
  • the default beam refers to the nearest M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N, and 1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) of the beams used to receive the downlink signal or downlink channel on the currently activated N (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) panel for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels.
  • M is an integer
  • L (1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and L is an integer) beams used for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels.
  • the default beam can refer to at least one of i, ii, and iii listed below.
  • the beam used for receiving the downlink signal or downlink channel that is closest to the reference time slot on each panel that is, a total of N Beams.
  • L is N
  • M is N.
  • the beams used for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels on the currently activated N panels the beams used for receiving the N downlink signals or downlink channels that are closest to the reference time slot, that is, a total of L beams. In this case, 1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and M is N.
  • the three examples of beams that can be referred to by the default beam listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the N times closest to the reference time slot can also be replaced with M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • the beams described in i, ii, and iii listed above are reference beams determined in three different ways. Since the beams described in i, ii, and iii are described in detail above in conjunction with FIG. 7, the reference beams described in this embodiment are similar to them, and for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the default beam refers to the currently activated N (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) panel of the beams used to receive the downlink signal or downlink channel determined by the initial access process, and the nearest M( 1 ⁇ M ⁇ N, and M is an integer) L (1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and L is an integer) beams used to transmit uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the default beam can refer to at least one of i, ii, and iii listed below.
  • the beam used for receiving the downlink signal or downlink channel closest to the reference time slot is 1, and M is 1.
  • the one closest to the reference time slot on each panel is used for the reception of downlink signals or downlink channels Beams, that is, a total of N beams.
  • L is N
  • M is N.
  • the beam used for receiving the N downlink signals or downlink channels closest to the reference time slot That is, there are a total of L beams. In this case, 1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and M is N.
  • the three examples of beams that can be referred to by the default beam listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the N times closest to the reference time slot can also be replaced with M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • the beams described in i, ii, and iii listed above are reference beams determined in three different ways. Since the beams described in i, ii, and iii are described in detail above in conjunction with FIG. 7, the reference beams described in this embodiment are similar to them, and for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the default beam refers to the currently activated N (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) panel of the beams used to receive the downlink signal or downlink channel determined by the random access process, the nearest M( 1 ⁇ M ⁇ N, and M is an integer) L (1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and L is an integer) beams used to transmit uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the default beam can refer to at least one of i, ii, and iii listed below.
  • the beam used for receiving the downlink signal or downlink channel closest to the reference time slot is 1, and M is 1.
  • the one closest to the reference time slot on each panel is used for the reception of downlink signals or downlink channels Beams, that is, a total of N beams.
  • L is N
  • M is N.
  • the beam used for receiving the N downlink signals or downlink channels closest to the reference time slot That is, there are a total of L beams. In this case, 1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and M is N.
  • the three examples of beams that can be referred to by the default beam listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the N times closest to the reference time slot can also be replaced with M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • the beams described in i, ii, and iii listed above are reference beams determined in three different ways. Since the beams described in i, ii, and iii are described in detail above in conjunction with FIG. 7, the reference beams described in this embodiment are similar to them, and for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the default beam refers to the receiving beam of the first synchronization signal block on the currently activated N panels, and the first synchronization signal block is determined by the initial access procedure.
  • the initial access procedure is used to determine the first synchronization signal block, and the receiving beam of the first synchronization signal block can be used as a reference beam to determine the default beam.
  • the default beam refers to the nearest M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N, and 1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) of the beams used to transmit uplink signals or uplink channels on the currently activated N panels (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) M is an integer) L (1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and L is an integer) beams used to transmit uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the default beam can refer to at least one of i, ii, and iii listed below.
  • the beam used for receiving the downlink signal or downlink channel that is closest to the reference time slot on each panel that is, a total of N Beams.
  • L is N
  • M is N.
  • the beams used for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels on the currently activated N panels the beams used for receiving the N downlink signals or downlink channels that are closest to the reference time slot, that is, a total of L beams. In this case, 1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and M is N.
  • the three examples of beams that can be referred to by the default beam listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the N times closest to the reference time slot can also be replaced with M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) times closest to the reference time slot.
  • the beams described in i, ii, and iii listed above are reference beams determined in three different ways. Since the beams described in i, ii, and iii are described in detail above in conjunction with FIG. 7, the reference beams described in this embodiment are similar to them, and for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the reference beam listed above may be a receiving beam or a transmitting beam. This application does not limit this.
  • the default beam can be determined with reference to the receiving beam, or it can be determined with reference to the transmitting beam.
  • the solution for the terminal device to determine the first receiving beam according to the default beam may be applicable to scenarios where the network device does not indicate the beam.
  • the network device does not send the above first indication information to indicate the first receiving beam.
  • high-level parameters such as high-level parameters tci-PresentInDCI
  • tci-PresentInDCI if the high-level parameter tci-PresentInDCI is set to disabled (disabled), it is considered that the network device will not indicate the beam to the terminal device; this scenario can also be passed DCI format is determined.
  • the network device is considered to indicate the beam to the terminal device; if the DCI used to schedule the PDSCH is DCI format 1_0, it is considered that the network device will not report to the terminal device Indicates the beam.
  • the solution for the terminal device to determine the first receiving beam according to the default beam may also be applicable to scenarios where the offset between the time when the network device sends the scheduling signaling and the time of the scheduled downlink signal or downlink channel transmission resource is less than a predetermined threshold.
  • the terminal device receives a downlink signal or a downlink channel through the first receiving beam.
  • the network device transmits the downlink signal or downlink channel through the transmission beam corresponding to the first reception beam.
  • the terminal device may determine the first receiving beam according to the first indication information sent by the network device, or may determine the first receiving beam by itself. Due to the beam pairing relationship, the network device also needs to use the transmitting beam corresponding to the first receiving beam to send the downlink signal or the downlink channel. Therefore, regardless of whether the network device sends the first indication information to indicate the first receive beam, the network device needs to know the currently activated panel of the terminal device in order to determine the transmit beam corresponding to the first receive beam.
  • the method further includes step 240.
  • the terminal device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the currently activated panel.
  • the network device receives the second indication information, which is used to indicate the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may report the ID of the currently activated panel to the network device, or may also report the information associated with the currently activated panel to the network device.
  • the information associated with the panel may be a reference signal resource identifier, such as the ID of a CSI-RS resource or an ID of a CSI-RS resource set; or, the information associated with the panel may be a TCI state, such as the ID of the TCI state.
  • the information associated with the panel may be a reference signal resource identifier, such as the ID of a CSI-RS resource or an ID of a CSI-RS resource set; or, the information associated with the panel may be a TCI state, such as the ID of the TCI state.
  • I will not list them all here. This application does not limit the specific information carried in the second indication information.
  • the terminal device can use the beam on the currently activated panel to receive the downlink signal or the downlink channel, which can avoid the large delay caused by the panel activation. Even if the terminal equipment needs to perform panel switching or beam switching, the delay caused by it is far reduced. Therefore, it is beneficial for the terminal device to complete panel switching or beam switching before the scheduled resource arrives, and use the selected beam to receive the downlink signal or the downlink channel. This helps to improve the transmission performance of the system.
  • the terminal device does not need to activate all panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation. In this way, all the panels of the terminal device do not need to be in the active state for a long time, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a signal transmission method 300 according to another embodiment of the present application. Specifically, FIG. 8 specifically shows a transmission method of an uplink signal or an uplink channel. As shown in the figure, the method 300 shown in FIG. 8 may include step 310 to step 340. The method 300 will be described in detail below in conjunction with the drawings.
  • the terminal device determines a first beam used to transmit an uplink signal or an uplink channel, and the first beam is a beam on a currently activated panel.
  • the first transmit beam may be a beam on a currently activated panel.
  • the first transmit beam may be one beam or multiple beams. This application does not limit the number of beams included in the first transmit beam.
  • the currently activated panel specifically refers to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the currently activated panel can be one panel or multiple panels. This application does not limit the number of currently activated panels.
  • the multiple beams may be beams on one panel that is currently activated, or beams on multiple panels that are currently activated.
  • the first transmit beam may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be determined by the terminal device itself.
  • the specific process of determining the first transmit beam by the terminal device will be described in detail below in combination with these two different methods.
  • the terminal device determines the first transmit beam according to the first indication information sent by the network device.
  • the method further includes step 320: the terminal device receives first indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first transmit beam.
  • the network device sends first indication information to the terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the first transmit beam.
  • the network device may indicate the first transmit beam to the terminal device in an implicit or explicit manner.
  • the first indication information may be a newly added field of existing signaling, or may reuse existing fields in existing signaling, or may be carried by newly added signaling. This application does not limit this.
  • the first indication information is carried in one or more of DCI, MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the network device can indicate the first receiving beam through one of the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages, or through a combination of two or three of the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages.
  • the first receive beam can indicate the first receiving beam through one of the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages, or through a combination of two or three of the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages.
  • step 310 specifically includes: the terminal device determines, according to the first indication information, the first receiving beam used to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel.
  • the specific method for the network device to instruct the first transmit beam through the first indication information and the specific method for the terminal device to determine the first transmit beam according to the first indication information will be described in detail below in conjunction with the transmission of specific downlink signals or downlink channels. It should be understood that the signaling shown below is only an example and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not exclude the possibility of using other signaling to indicate the first transmit beam.
  • the uplink channel is PUSCH
  • the first indication information is carried in the DCI and RRC messages.
  • the DCI may include an SRS resource indicator (SRS resource indicator), where the SRS resource indicator is used to indicate a selected SRS resource, and the SRS resource corresponds to a transmit beam.
  • SRS resource indicator used to indicate a selected SRS resource
  • the transmission beam corresponding to the SRS resource may be determined by the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource and the spatial relationship configured by the network device in advance through the RRC message.
  • the DCI indirectly indicates the selected transmission beam through the SRS resource indication field.
  • the selected transmission beam is the first transmission beam.
  • the transmit beam determined by the SRS resource indicated in the DCI is the first transmit beam, which can be used to transmit PUSCH.
  • the first transmit beam is the beam on the panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the network device may schedule the PUSCH for the terminal device through the DCI of the format 0_1 (format 0_1) (which may be referred to as DCI format 0_1).
  • DCI format 0_1 format 0_1
  • the terminal device may determine the first transmission beam based on the foregoing first indication information.
  • the aforementioned DCI format 0_1 and the first indication information may be the same signaling, or may be different signaling. This application does not limit this.
  • each spatial relationship can be used to determine a transmit beam.
  • each SRS resource can correspond to one transmit beam.
  • the network device can configure one or more transmit beams through the RRC message.
  • the network device may determine the correspondence between the SRS resource configured through the RRC message and the spatial relationship according to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the transmission beam determined by each SRS resource may be a beam on a panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the transmit beam determined by any SRS resource may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the network device determines and instructs the first transmit beam for the terminal device, it only needs to ensure that at least one of the spatial relationship corresponding to the SRS configured by the RRC message and the spatial relationship indicated by the DCI is in the terminal. On the activated panel of the device, it can be ensured that the first transmit beam used by the terminal device to transmit the PUSCH is on the activated panel.
  • the terminal device may directly determine the first transmit beam according to the correspondence configured by the RRC message. There is no need for the network device to indicate an SRS resource through DCI to determine the corresponding transmit beam.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information may be an RRC message.
  • the uplink channel is PUSCH
  • the first indication information is carried in DCI, MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the DCI may be, for example, DCI used for scheduling PUSCH, or DCI used for other purposes.
  • the DCI may include a spatial relationship indication.
  • the spatial relationship indication may be, for example, the ID of the spatial relationship.
  • the spatial relationship indication is used to indicate a selected spatial relationship, so the spatial relationship indicated in the DCI is used to determine one or more transmit beams.
  • one or more transmit beams determined by the spatial relationship indicated by the DCI are the first transmit beams, which can be used to transmit PUSCH. And the first transmit beam is the beam on the panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the above-mentioned selected spatial relationship may be one of one or more spatial relationships activated by the network device through MAC-CE in advance.
  • the ID of the spatial relationship indicated in the above DCI may be, for example, the relative ID of one or more spatial relationships activated by the MAC-CE.
  • each activated spatial relationship can be used to determine one or more transmit beams.
  • the network device may determine the activated spatial relationship according to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the transmit beam determined by one or more activated spatial relationships may be a beam on a panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the transmission beam determined by any one of the activated spatial relationships may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the one or more spatial relationships activated by the MAC-CE may be the spatial relationships in the spatial relationship list configured by the network device for the terminal device in advance through the RRC message.
  • One or more spatial relationships activated by MAC-CE can be understood as a subset of the spatial relationship list.
  • each spatial relationship in the spatial relationship list can be used to determine one or more beams.
  • the network device may determine the spatial relationship in the spatial relationship list according to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the transmission beam determined by each spatial relationship in the spatial relationship list may be a beam on a panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the transmit beam determined by any one spatial relationship in the spatial relationship list may be a beam on a panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the network device determines and instructs the first transmit beam for the terminal device, it only needs to ensure that at least one of the spatial relationship configured by the RRC message, the spatial relationship activated by the MAC-CE, and the spatial relationship indicated by the DCI is required.
  • the determined beam is on the activated panel of the terminal device, which can ensure that the first transmit beam used by the terminal device to transmit the PUSCH is on the activated panel.
  • the terminal device may directly determine the first transmit beam according to the spatial relationship configured in the RRC message. There is no need for the network device to activate part of the spatial relationship in the spatial relationship list through the MAC-CE and indicate the selected spatial relationship through the DCI. In this case, the aforementioned first indication information may only be carried in the RRC message.
  • the terminal device can directly determine the activated space according to the spatial relationship configured in the RRC message Relationship, and then determine a selected spatial relationship according to DCI. There is no need for the network device to activate part of the spatial relationship in the spatial relationship list through the MAC-CE. In this case, the above-mentioned first indication information may be carried in the DCI and RRC messages.
  • the terminal device may determine the first transmit beam according to the spatial relationship activated by the MAC-CE. There is no need for network equipment to indicate the selected spatial relationship through DCI. In this case, the above-mentioned first indication information may be carried in MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the network device can still indicate the first transmit beam through the RRC message, MAC-CE, and DCI in sequence.
  • the uplink channel is PUCCH
  • the first indication information is carried in MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the MAC-CE is used to activate a spatial relationship.
  • the spatial relationship activated by the MAC-CE is used to determine the transmission beam.
  • the transmit beam determined by the spatial relationship activated by the MAC-CE is the first transmit beam, which can be used to transmit PUCCH.
  • the first transmit beam is the beam on the panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives an RRC message, where the RRC message is used to configure a spatial relationship list, and the spatial relationship list includes one or more spatial relationships.
  • the network device sends an RRC message, the RRC message is used to configure a spatial relationship list, and the spatial relationship list includes one or more spatial relationships.
  • the above-mentioned spatial relationship activated by the MAC-CE may be a spatial relationship in a spatial relationship list configured by the network device for the terminal device in advance through an RRC message. Further optionally, the network device may determine the spatial relationship in the spatial relationship list according to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the transmission beam determined by each spatial relationship in the spatial relationship list may be a beam on a panel currently activated by the terminal device. In other words, the transmit beam determined by any one spatial relationship in the spatial relationship list may be a beam on a panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the specific method for the network device to configure the spatial relationship list for the terminal device through the RRC message is similar to the specific method for the network device to configure the TCI state list for the terminal device through the RRC message described above. For brevity, I won't repeat them here.
  • the spatial relationship included in the spatial relationship list is used to determine the spatial relationship of the first transmit beam.
  • the network device can directly instruct the first transmit beam through the RRC message, and does not need to activate a spatial relationship in the spatial relationship list through the MAC-CE. That is, the first indication information may only be carried in the RRC message.
  • the uplink signal is an aperiodic SRS
  • the first indication information is carried in DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages.
  • the DCI may be DCI used to trigger the transmission of aperiodic SRS, or DCI used for other purposes.
  • the DCI indicates a selected SRS resource set (SRS resource set), and the selected SRS resource set includes one or more SRS resources (SRS resource). Since each SRS resource corresponds to a spatial relationship, each SRS resource is used to determine a transmission beam. Therefore, the selected SRS resource set indicated in the DCI can be used to determine one or more transmit beams.
  • one or more transmit beams determined by the SRS resource set indicated by the DCI are the first transmit beams and can be used to transmit aperiodic SRS. And the first transmit beam is the transmit beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the network device can trigger the transmission of aperiodic SRS through DCI.
  • the terminal device may determine the first transmit beam based on the foregoing first indication information.
  • the DCI used to trigger the transmission of the aperiodic SRS and the DCI carrying the first indication information may be the same DCI, or may be different DCIs. This application does not limit this.
  • the aforementioned selected SRS resource set may be one of one or more SRS resource sets activated by the network device through MAC-CE in advance.
  • the ID of the SRS resource set indicated in the above DCI may be, for example, the relative ID of one or more SRS resource sets activated by the MAC-CE. As a result, the bit overhead in DCI can be reduced.
  • the network device may determine the SRS resource set activated by MAC-CE according to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the transmission beam determined by the spatial relationship corresponding to each SRS resource set may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the transmit beam determined by the spatial relationship corresponding to any one SRS resource set in the SRS resource set activated by the MAC-CE may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the above-mentioned SRS resource set activated by MAC-CE may be a subset of one or more SRS resource sets configured in advance by the network device through the RRC message. It is understandable that each SRS resource set in the one or more SRS resource sets configured by the RRC message can be used to determine one or more transmit beams.
  • the network device may determine the SRS resource set configured through the RRC message according to the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the transmission beam determined by the spatial relationship corresponding to each SRS resource set may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the transmit beam determined by the spatial relationship corresponding to any SRS resource set configured by the RRC message may be the beam on the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the network device determines and instructs the first transmission beam for the terminal device, it only needs to ensure that at least one of the spatial relationship of the RRC message configuration and the spatial relationship of the MAC-CE activation is in the terminal device. On the activated panel, it can be ensured that the first transmit beam used by the terminal device to send the PUCCH is on the activated panel.
  • the terminal device can directly determine the first transmit beam according to the SRS resource set configured in the RRC message, without the need to use MAC-CE and DCI. Indicates the selected SRS resource set. In this case, the aforementioned first indication information may only be carried in the RRC message.
  • the terminal device can directly determine the first transmission beam according to the activated SRS in the MAC-CE, without indicating the selected SRS resource set through DCI.
  • the foregoing first indication information may be carried in MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the uplink signal is a semi-persistent (SP) SRS
  • the first indication information is carried in MAC-CE
  • the first indication information is carried in MAC-CE and RRC messages .
  • the MAC-CE is used to activate an SRS resource set, and the activated SRS resource set includes one or more SRS resources. Since each SRS resource corresponds to a spatial relationship, each SRS resource is used to determine a transmission beam. Therefore, the SRS resource set activated in the MAC-CE can be used to determine one or more transmit beams for transmitting semi-persistent SRS.
  • the spatial relationship corresponding to the SRS resource in the MAC-CE may be configured by the MAC-CE, or configured by the network device through an RRC message.
  • the terminal device can preferentially determine the spatial relationship corresponding to the activated SRS resource set according to the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource and the spatial relationship configured in the MAC-CE, and then Determine the first transmit beam.
  • the above-mentioned first indication information is only carried in the MAC-CE.
  • the terminal device can determine the spatial relationship corresponding to the activated SRS resource set according to the corresponding relationship between the SRS resource and the spatial relationship configured in the RRC message, and then determine the first One launch beam.
  • the aforementioned first indication information is carried in the MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the network device determines and instructs the first transmission beam for the terminal device, it only needs to ensure the spatial relationship corresponding to the SRS resource configured in the RRC message and the SRS activated by the MAC-CE At least one beam determined in the spatial relationship corresponding to the resource is on the activated panel of the terminal device, which can ensure that the first transmitting beam used by the terminal device to transmit the semi-persistent SRS is on the activated panel.
  • the uplink signal is a periodic SRS
  • the first indication information is carried in an RRC message.
  • one or more SRS resource sets are configured in the RRC message, and each SRS resource set includes one or more SRS resources. Since each SRS resource corresponds to a spatial relationship, each SRS resource is used to determine a transmission beam. Therefore, one or more SRS resource sets configured by the RRC message can be used to determine one or more transmit beams.
  • one or more transmit beams determined by the SRS resource set configured by the RRC message are the first transmit beams and can be used to transmit periodic SRS. And the first transmit beam is the beam on the panel currently activated by the terminal device.
  • the specific method for the network device to indicate the first transmission beam through the first indication information and the specific method for the terminal device to determine the first transmission beam according to the first indication information is described in detail in conjunction with the transmission of the uplink signal or the uplink channel.
  • the embodiments listed above are only examples, and this application does not limit the types of uplink signals and uplink channels, and this application does not limit the specific methods for scheduling or triggering transmission of uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the terminal device can determine the first transmit beam by itself.
  • step 310 specifically includes: the terminal device determines a default beam according to the currently activated panel, and uses the default beam as the first transmit beam for transmitting the uplink signal or the uplink channel.
  • the default beam refers to beams satisfying preset conditions on one or more panels currently activated.
  • the default beam refers to the receive beam of the first PDCCH used in the first time slot
  • the receive beam of the first PDCCH is the receive beam on the currently activated panel with the smallest ID ID of one or more control resources.
  • the receiving beam corresponding to the control resource set, and the one or more control resource sets are the control resource sets monitored by the terminal device in the first time slot; the first time slot is the distance reference time slot in the one or more time slots
  • each of the one or more time slots is configured with one or more control resource sets, and the one or more control resource sets are configured in each of the one or more time slots.
  • at least one receiving beam that controls the resource set is on the currently activated panel.
  • the default beam refers to the currently activated N (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) panel of the beams used to receive the synchronization signal block determined by the random access process, the nearest M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N, and M is an integer) L (1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and L is an integer) beams used for receiving the sub-synchronization signal block.
  • the default beam refers to the currently activated N (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) panel beam used to receive synchronization signal blocks, the nearest M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N, and M is Integer) L (1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and L is an integer) beams used for receiving the sub-synchronization signal block.
  • the default beam refers to the nearest M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N, and 1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) of the beams used to receive the downlink signal or downlink channel on the currently activated N (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) panel for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels.
  • M is an integer
  • L (1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and L is an integer) beams used for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels.
  • the default beam refers to the beams used for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels determined by the initial access procedure on the currently activated N (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) panels.
  • the default beam refers to the beams used for receiving downlink signals or downlink channels determined by the random access procedure on the currently activated N (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) panels.
  • the default beam refers to the receiving beams of the first synchronization signal block on the currently activated N (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) panels, and the first synchronization signal block is determined by the initial access procedure.
  • the default beam refers to the nearest M (1 ⁇ M ⁇ N, and 1 ⁇ M ⁇ N) of the beams used to transmit uplink signals or uplink channels on the currently activated N panels (N ⁇ 1 and an integer) M is an integer) L (1 ⁇ L ⁇ N, and L is an integer) beams used to transmit uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the reference time slot may refer to the time slot where the transmission resource of the signal or channel scheduled or triggered by the network device is located.
  • the reference time slot may also be, for example, the time slot where the physical uplink control channel is located, or the time slot where the physical uplink shared channel is located, or the time slot where the transmission resources of the uplink reference signal (such as sounding reference signal (SRS)) are located.
  • SRS sounding reference signal
  • the terminal device transmits an uplink signal or an uplink channel through the first transmit beam.
  • the network device receives the uplink signal or the uplink channel through a receiving beam corresponding to the first transmitting beam.
  • the terminal device may determine the first transmit beam according to the first indication information sent by the network device, or may determine the first transmit beam by itself. Due to the beam pairing relationship, the network device also needs to use the receiving beam corresponding to the first transmitting beam to receive the uplink signal or the uplink channel. Therefore, regardless of whether the network device sends the first indication information to indicate the first transmit beam, the network device needs to know the currently activated panel of the terminal device in order to determine the receive beam corresponding to the first transmit beam.
  • the method further includes step 340.
  • the terminal device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the currently activated panel.
  • the network device receives the second indication information, which is used to indicate the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may report the ID of the currently activated panel to the network device, or may also report the information associated with the currently activated panel to the network device.
  • the information associated with the panel may be a reference signal resource identifier, such as the ID of an SRS resource or the ID of an SRS resource set; or, the information associated with the panel may be a spatial relationship, such as the ID of a spatial relationship.
  • the information associated with the panel may be a reference signal resource identifier, such as the ID of an SRS resource or the ID of an SRS resource set; or, the information associated with the panel may be a spatial relationship, such as the ID of a spatial relationship.
  • This application does not limit the specific information carried in the second indication information.
  • the terminal device can use the beam on the currently activated panel to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel, which can avoid the large delay caused by the panel activation. Even if the terminal equipment needs to perform panel switching or beam switching, the delay caused by it is far reduced. Therefore, it is beneficial for the terminal device to complete panel switching or beam switching before the scheduled resource arrives, and use the selected beam to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel. This helps to improve the transmission performance of the system. In addition, the terminal device does not need to activate all the panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • the signal transmission method provided by the embodiment of the present application has been described in detail with reference to FIGS. 2 to 8.
  • the signal transmission method provided above is not limited to the terminal device to determine the beam, and the signal transmission method provided above can also be used for the network device to determine the beam.
  • the network device can determine the transmit beam used to transmit the downlink signal or the downlink channel according to the currently activated panel; or the network device can determine the receive beam used to receive the uplink signal or the uplink channel according to the currently activated panel.
  • the present application also provides a signal transmission method, which can avoid a large delay in panel activation, which is beneficial to improve the system transmission performance.
  • the signal transmission method provided by another embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 9.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic flowchart of a signal transmission method 400 provided by an embodiment of the present application from the perspective of device interaction. Specifically, FIG. 9 shows a transmission method of an uplink signal or an uplink channel. As shown in the figure, the method 400 shown in FIG. 9 may include step 410 to step 440. The method 400 will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.
  • the terminal device determines a second beam used to transmit an uplink signal or an uplink channel.
  • the second beam and the third beam used for receiving the scheduling channel are beams on the same panel.
  • the scheduling channel is used for scheduling uplink signals or uplink channels, or the scheduling channel is used for triggering transmission of uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the transmitting beam determined by the terminal device for transmitting the uplink signal or the uplink channel is recorded as the second beam
  • the receiving beam for receiving the scheduling channel by the terminal device is recorded as the third beam
  • the scheduling channel can be used to schedule uplink resources to transmit uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the network device may schedule the PUSCH through a scheduling channel, and the scheduling channel may be a PDCCH, for example.
  • the scheduling channel can also be used to trigger the transmission of uplink signals or uplink channels.
  • the network device may trigger the transmission of aperiodic SRS through a scheduling channel, and the scheduling channel may also be a PDCCH, for example.
  • scheduling channel is only defined for ease of understanding and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • the scheduling channels may be different channels. This application does not limit the specific channel used as the scheduling channel.
  • the second beam and the third beam are beams on the same panel. Since the scheduling channel arrives before the transmission resources of the uplink signal or the uplink channel, the time when the terminal device receives the scheduling channel is earlier than the time when the uplink signal or the uplink channel is sent.
  • the third beam used by the terminal device to receive the scheduling channel must be the beam on the panel that was activated when the scheduling channel was received, so the second beam on the same panel as the third beam must also be on the activated panel. Beam. Therefore, in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation, the terminal device can keep the panel activated after receiving the scheduling channel, and when the transmission resource for sending the uplink signal or the uplink channel arrives, it can directly pass the first activation on the activated panel.
  • the second beam may be indicated by the network device through signaling, or may be determined by the terminal device itself.
  • the specific process of determining the second beam by the terminal device will be described in detail below in combination with these two different methods.
  • the terminal device determines the second beam according to the third indication information sent by the network device.
  • the method further includes step 420: the terminal device receives third indication information from the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the second beam.
  • the network device sends third indication information to the terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate the second beam.
  • the first indication information is carried in one or more of DCI, MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the specific method for the network device to indicate the second beam to the terminal device through the third indication information may be the same as the specific method for the network device to indicate the first transmission beam to the terminal device through the first indication information in the method 300 above. For brevity, it will not be repeated here. .
  • the network device instructs the first transmit beam through a combination of two or three items in the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages, it only needs to ensure that one of the two or three items in the DCI, MAC-CE, and RRC messages is combined. If at least one of the determined beams is on the activated panel of the terminal device, it can be ensured that the first transmission beam indicated by the first indication information is on the activated panel of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device determines the second beam used to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel according to the panel where the third beam is located.
  • the terminal device can select the transmit beam used to transmit the uplink signal or the uplink channel from the panel where the third beam is located as the second beam.
  • step 430 the terminal device transmits the uplink signal or the uplink channel through the second beam.
  • the network device receives the uplink signal or the uplink channel through the receiving beam corresponding to the second beam.
  • the uplink signal or uplink channel may be the uplink signal or uplink channel transmitted on the transmission resource previously scheduled by the network device through the scheduling channel.
  • the terminal device may determine the second beam according to the third indication information sent by the network device, or may determine the second beam by itself. Due to the beam pairing relationship, the network device also needs to use the receiving beam corresponding to the second beam to receive the uplink signal or the uplink channel. Therefore, regardless of whether the network device sends the third indication information to indicate the second beam, the network device needs to know the currently activated panel of the terminal device in order to determine the receiving beam corresponding to the second beam.
  • the method further includes step 440.
  • the terminal device sends fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the currently activated panel.
  • the network device receives the fourth indication information, which is used to indicate the currently activated panel of the terminal device.
  • Step 440 is the same as the specific process in which the terminal device sends the second indication information in step 340 of the method 300 above, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the specific process for the terminal device to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel through the second beam may be the same as the prior art. For brevity, detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
  • the terminal device can determine the second beam used to transmit the uplink signal or the uplink channel according to the panel where the third beam used by the receiving scheduling channel is located. Since the terminal device uses the third beam when receiving the scheduling channel, the panel where the third beam is located is the activated panel, and the second beam is determined on the panel, that is, the second beam is determined on the currently activated panel . This can avoid the large time delay caused by panel activation. Even if the terminal equipment needs to perform panel switching or beam switching, the delay caused by it is far reduced. Therefore, it is beneficial for the terminal device to complete panel switching or beam switching before the scheduled resource arrives, and use the selected beam to send the uplink signal or the uplink channel. This helps to improve the transmission performance of the system.
  • the terminal device does not need to activate all panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation. In this way, all panels of the terminal device do not need to be active for a long time. In this way, all the panels of the terminal device do not need to be in the active state for a long time, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • this application also provides a panel switching method.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a panel indication method 500 according to another embodiment of the present application, shown from the perspective of device interaction. As shown in the figure, the method 500 may include step 510 to step 530. The method 500 will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.
  • step 510 the network device sends a panel activation command to the terminal device at the first time node, and the panel activation command is used to activate one or more panels.
  • the terminal device receives a panel activation command from the network device at the first time node, and the panel activation command is used to activate one or more panels.
  • the panel activation command can be reused existing signaling or newly added signaling. This application does not limit this.
  • the network device can instruct the panel through the panel activation command, such as the ID of the panel or other information that can be used to uniquely indicate a panel, such as the beam corresponding to the panel.
  • the panel activation command is beam indication information.
  • the panel and the beam have a corresponding relationship.
  • the beam indicated by the beam indication information can be used to determine the panel that needs to be activated.
  • the network device may obtain in advance the correspondence between the panel of the terminal device and the beam.
  • the terminal device may report to the network device, or pre-defined, which is not limited in this application.
  • the network device may indicate the beam through the beam indication information and implicitly indicate the panel to be activated according to the correspondence between the panel and the beam.
  • the beam indication information may be, for example, the first indication information listed in the above method 200 or method 300; or, it may also be the third indication information listed in the above method 400; or, it may also be a newly added user. To indicate the information of the beam. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device can know the corresponding relationship between the panel it configures and each beam. Therefore, after receiving the beam indication information sent by the network device, it can determine the panel to be activated according to the corresponding relationship between the panel and the beam.
  • the correspondence between the panel and the beam may be that one panel corresponds to one beam, or one panel corresponds to multiple beams, which is not limited in this application. Since the network device may activate one or more panels through the panel activation command, there may also be one or more beams indicated in the beam indication information. This application does not limit this.
  • the panel activation command includes an indication of one or more panels to be activated.
  • the indication of the panel may be the ID of the SRS resource, the ID of the SRS resource set, the ID of the NZP-CSI-RS resource, and the NZP-CSI-RS resource. Set ID, ID of spatial relationship, ID of TCI state, etc.
  • the protocol defines a panel through certain information
  • the network device can indicate one or more panels that need to be activated based on the correspondence between the information and the panel.
  • the panel activation command is configured in one or more of DCI, MAC-CE and RRC messages.
  • the panel activation command may be beam instruction information.
  • the beam indication information can be carried in one or more of DCI, MAC-CE and RRC messages, so the panel activation command can also be carried in one or more of DCI, MAC-CE and RRC messages. Multiple in.
  • the panel activation command can also be independent signaling.
  • the independent signaling may reuse existing DCI, MAC-CE or RRC messages, or may also be newly added signaling. This application does not limit this.
  • step 520 the terminal device transmits and receives signals at the second time node.
  • the network device transmits and receives signals at the second time node.
  • the terminal device may receive a downlink signal or a downlink channel at the second time node.
  • the network device can send a downlink signal or a downlink channel at the second time node.
  • the terminal device may also send an uplink signal or an uplink channel at the second time node.
  • the terminal device may also receive the uplink signal or the uplink channel at the second time node.
  • the signal or channel sent and received by the terminal device at the second time node may be a signal or channel that the network device schedules or triggers transmission through a scheduling channel.
  • the scheduling channel may be, for example, the scheduling channel described in the above method 400;
  • the signal or channel sent and received by the second time node may also be a signal or channel sent by the terminal device in a dynamic authorization-free transmission mode. This application does not limit the signals or channels sent and received by the second time node.
  • the time interval between the second time node and the first time node is greater than or equal to the sum of the duration of panel activation, the duration of panel switching, and the duration of correctly receiving the panel activation command.
  • FIG. 11 shows an example of the first time node and the second time node.
  • the terminal device correctly receives the panel activation command at the first time node, and the second time node is the starting position where the resources used to transmit signals or channels arrive.
  • the time interval between the first time node and the second time node can be restricted to be greater than or equal to the panel activation time, the panel switching time, and the time to correctly receive the panel activation command Sum. Therefore, it can be ensured that the terminal device can use the beam on the activated panel to send and receive signals when the transmission resources of the signal or channel arrive.
  • the time interval between the second time node and the first time node is limited to be greater than or equal to the panel activation time, the panel switching time, and the correct reception of the
  • the sum of the duration of the panel activation command only ensures that the terminal device can use the beam on the panel activated by the panel activation command to send and receive signals when the signal or channel transmission resources arrive, but it does not mean that the terminal device will definitely use the panel activation command to activate The beam on the panel sends and receives signals.
  • the panel activation command may also be a panel activated for the next or next signal or channel transmission.
  • the method further includes step 530: the network device sends a panel switching command to the terminal device, where the panel switching command is used to instruct to switch to the panel activated by the panel activation command.
  • the terminal device receives a panel switching command from the network device, and the panel switching command is used to instruct to switch to the panel activated by the panel activation command.
  • the terminal device After receiving the panel activation command described in step 510, the terminal device can activate one or more panels indicated by the panel activation command, and can switch the panel to a panel after receiving the panel switching command in step 530 Activate one or more panels activated by the command.
  • the panel activation command and the panel switching command may be the same field in the same signaling, that is, the activation and switching instructions are completed through the same field.
  • the panel that needs to be activated and the panel that needs to be switched indicated by the network device may be the same.
  • the terminal device can switch the panel to all active panels.
  • the panel activation command and the panel switching command may be different fields in the same signaling, that is, the activation and switching instructions are completed through different fields.
  • the panel that needs to be activated and the panel that needs to be switched indicated by the network device may be the same or different.
  • the terminal device can switch the panel to all or part of the active panel.
  • the panel activation command and the panel switching command may be different signaling.
  • the panel that needs to be activated and the panel that needs to be switched indicated by the network device may be the same or different.
  • the terminal device can switch the panel to all or part of the active panel.
  • the panel switching command may be a signaling sent after the panel activation command.
  • the panel switching command is beam indication information.
  • the panel and the beam have a corresponding relationship.
  • the beam indicated by the beam indication information can be used to determine the panel to be switched.
  • the network device may obtain in advance the correspondence between the panel of the terminal device and the beam.
  • the terminal device may report to the network device, or pre-defined, which is not limited in this application.
  • the network device can indicate the beam through the beam indication information and implicitly indicate the panel to be switched according to the correspondence between the panel and the beam.
  • the beam indication information may be, for example, the first indication information listed in the above method 200 or method 300; or, it may also be the third indication information listed in the above method 400; or, it may also be a newly added user. To indicate the information of the beam. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device can know the corresponding relationship between the panel it configures and each beam. Therefore, after receiving the beam instruction information sent by the network device, it can determine the panel to be switched according to the corresponding relationship between the panel and the beam.
  • the correspondence between the panel and the beam may be that one panel corresponds to one beam, or one panel corresponds to multiple beams, which is not limited in this application. Since the number of panels switched by the network device through the panel switching command may be one or more, the beam indicated in the beam indication information may also be one or more. This application does not limit this.
  • the panel switching command includes an indication of the panel to be switched.
  • the network device can indicate one or more panels that need to be switched based on the correspondence between the information and the panel.
  • the time interval between the first time node and the second time node is greater than or equal to the duration of panel activation, the duration of panel switching, the duration of the terminal device correctly receiving the panel activation command and the terminal device correctly receiving the panel switching command Sum.
  • the time interval between the first time node and the second time node can be further limited to be greater than or equal to the panel activation time, panel switching The sum of the length of time for the terminal device to correctly receive the panel activation command and the terminal device to correctly receive the panel switching command.
  • the time interval between the first time node and the second time node can be simplified to be greater than or equal to the panel activation time, the panel switching time, and the terminal The device correctly receives the sum of time for the panel activation command.
  • the time at which the terminal device correctly receives the panel activation command and the terminal device correctly receives the panel switching command may coincide, so the first time node and the first time node
  • the time interval between the two time nodes can also be simplified to be greater than or equal to the sum of the duration of panel activation, the duration of panel switching, and the duration of the terminal device correctly receiving the panel activation command.
  • FIG. 10 is only schematic for ease of understanding, and should not constitute any limitation to the application.
  • the panel switching command in the figure can overlap with the panel activation command.
  • the scheduling channel shown in the figure is only an example, and the scheduling channel may not exist in the actual transmission process.
  • this application does not limit the sequence of sending the panel activation command, the panel switching command, and the scheduling channel.
  • step 520 specifically includes: the terminal device sends and receives signals through the beam on the activated panel at the second time node.
  • the network device transmits and receives signals at the second time node through the beam corresponding to the beam on the panel activated by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may predetermine the beam used to transmit and receive signals.
  • the beam is the beam on the panel activated by the panel activation command at the first time node.
  • the method for the terminal device to determine the beam may be, for example, the method described in the method 200, the method 300, or the method 400 above.
  • the network device may transmit and receive signals through the beam corresponding to the beam of the terminal device according to the predetermined beam pairing relationship.
  • FIG. 11 shows an example of the terminal device transmitting and receiving signals through the beam on the activated panel at the second time node. As shown in the figure, the terminal device activates and switches to panel 1 after receiving the panel activation command at the first time node. At the second time node, the terminal device transmits and receives signals through the beam on the panel 1.
  • the terminal device reserves sufficient time for panel switching, so that the terminal device can complete the panel switch before the signal or channel transmission resource arrives. During the signal or channel transmission When the resource arrives, use the beam on the activated panel to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device can activate the panel according to the panel activation command of the network device, by limiting the time interval between the second time node and the first time node to be greater than or equal to the panel activation time, the panel switching time, and the correct reception of the panel activation
  • the terminal device does not need to activate all panels in order to avoid the time delay caused by panel activation. In this way, all the panels of the terminal device do not need to be in the active state for a long time, so the power saving effect can also be achieved.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 12, the communication device 1000 may include a transceiving unit 1100 and a processing unit 1200.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device or a chip configured in the terminal device.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 200, the method 300, the method 400, or the method 500 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a method for executing the method 200 in FIG.
  • the method 300 in FIG. 9, the method 400 in FIG. 9, or the method 500 in FIG. 10 is a unit of the method executed by the terminal device.
  • the units in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions described above are respectively intended to implement the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 8, the method 400 in FIG. 9, or the method 500 in FIG. Process.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 220 to 240 in the method 200, and the processing unit 1200 can be used to execute step 210 in the method 200. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 320 to 240 in the method 300, and the processing unit 1200 can be used to execute step 310 in the method 300. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 420 to 440 in the method 400, and the processing unit 1200 can be used to execute step 410 in the method 400. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and will not be repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 may be used to execute steps 520 to 530 in the method 500.
  • the processing unit 1200 may activate the panel after step 510, and may perform step 530. Then switch the panel. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 13, and the processing unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may It corresponds to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 13.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device or a chip configured in the network device.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to a network device in the method 200, method 300, method 400, or method 500 according to an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include methods for executing the method 200 and FIG.
  • the method 300 in FIG. 9, the method 400 in FIG. 9, or the method 500 in FIG. 10 is a unit of the method executed by the network device.
  • the units in the communication device 1000 and the other operations and/or functions described above are respectively intended to implement the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 8, the method 400 in FIG. 9, or the method 500 in FIG. Process.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 220 to 240 in the method 200, and the processing unit 1200 can be used to execute step 210 in the method 200. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 320 to 240 in the method 300, and the processing unit 1200 can be used to execute step 310 in the method 300. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 420 to 440 in the method 400, and the processing unit 1200 can be used to execute step 410 in the method 400. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiving unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 510 to 530 in the method 500, and the processing unit 1200 can be used to determine one or more of the terminal devices that need to be activated before step 510. Multiple panels. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 3200 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 14, and the processing unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may It corresponds to the processor 3100 in the network device 3000 shown in FIG. 14.
  • the transceiver unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 2000 can be applied to the system shown in Fig. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020.
  • the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030.
  • the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002, and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 2030 is used for storing computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used for downloading from the memory 2030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
  • the aforementioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 can be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to implement the aforementioned functions.
  • the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010.
  • the processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 12.
  • the aforementioned transceiver 2020 may correspond to the transceiver unit in FIG. 12, and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or called receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or called transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 13 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiments shown in FIGS. 2 and 8 to 10.
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 2000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned processor 2010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send or receive from the network device action.
  • the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send or receive from the network device action.
  • the aforementioned terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 2000 may also include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, and a sensor 2100.
  • the audio circuit A speaker 2082, a microphone 2084, etc. may also be included.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, it may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station.
  • the base station 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the base station 3000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 3100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as distributed unit (DU) )) 3200.
  • RRU 3100 may be called a transceiver unit, and corresponds to the transceiver unit 1200 in FIG. 12.
  • the transceiver unit 3100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 3101 and a radio frequency unit 3102.
  • the transceiver unit 3100 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit).
  • the RRU 3100 part is mainly used for sending and receiving of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment.
  • the 3200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing and control of the base station.
  • the RRU 3100 and the BBU 3200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 3200 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing unit, which may correspond to the processing unit 1100 in FIG. 12, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading.
  • the BBU processing unit
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
  • the BBU 3200 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network with a single access standard (such as an LTE network), or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 3200 also includes a memory 3201 and a processor 3202.
  • the memory 3201 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 3202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 3201 and the processor 3202 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 14 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiments shown in FIGS. 2 and 8 to 10.
  • the operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station 3000 are used to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned BBU 3200 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the processing device may be a chip.
  • the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processing circuit
  • microcontroller unit microcontroller unit
  • MCU programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the steps of the above method can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application can be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electronic Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • serial link DRAM SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes computer program code.
  • the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes FIGS. 2 and 8 to Figure 10 shows the method in the embodiment.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable medium that stores program code, and when the program code runs on a computer, the computer executes FIGS. 2 and 8 to Figure 10 shows the method in the embodiment.
  • the present application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (solid state disc, SSD)) etc.
  • the network equipment in the above-mentioned device embodiments completely corresponds to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps.
  • the communication unit transmits the receiving or In the sending step, other steps except sending and receiving can be executed by the processing unit (processor).
  • the processing unit processor
  • component used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution.
  • the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor.
  • the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers.
  • these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • the component may be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • a signal having one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs).
  • programs When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种信号传输方法和通信装置。该方法包括：终端设备确定用于传输信号的波束，该波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束；终端设备通过该波束接收下行信号或下行信道；或者，终端设备通过该波束发送上行信号或上行信道。因此，终端设备可以使用当前已激活的面板上的波束来传输信号，可以避免由于面板激活和面板切换带来的时延，有利于提高系统传输性能。

Description

信号传输方法和通信装置
本申请要求于2019年2月15日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910118215.6、申请名称为“信号传输方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及无线通信领域，并且更具体地，涉及信号传输方法和通信装置。
背景技术
在某些通信系统中，例如，第五代(5th generation，5G)通信系统的新无线接入技术(new radio access technology，NR)中，为了在高频场景下对抗路径损耗，发送端和接收端可分别通过波束赋形(beamforming)来获得增益。发送端和接收端可通过预先确定的波束配对关系来收发信号。
由于波束具有一定的空间指向性，为了满足广域覆盖，终端设备可能配置多个天线面板(antenna panel)。波束可以通过天线面板接收或发送。当终端设备需要切换波束时，可能需要先切换面板，再切换到相应的波束来收发信号。然而，终端设备切换面板可能需要一定的时间。若终端设备在接收到调度信令后切换面板，有可能还未来得及切换，被调度的资源就已经到达。从而该资源上承载的信号也可能未被成功传输。
发明内容
本申请提供一种信号传输方法和通信装置，以减小面板切换带来的时延，有利于提高系统的传输性能。
第一方面，提供了一种信号传输方法。具体地，该方法包括：终端设备确定用于接收下行信号或下行信道的第一波束，所述第一波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束；该终端设备通过该第一波束接收该下行信号或下行信道。
应理解，该方法可以由终端设备执行，也可以由配置于终端设备中的芯片执行。本申请对此不作限定。
基于上述技术方案，终端设备可以使用当前已激活的面板上的波束来接收下行信号或下行信道，可以避免面板激活带来的较大时延。终端设备即便要进行面板切换或波束切换，其带来的时延也远远减小。因此，有利于终端设备在调度的资源到来之前完成面板切换或波束切换，使用所选择的波束来接收下行信号或下行信道。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活。如此一来，终端设备的所有面板不需要长时间处于激活状态，因此也可以达到节电效果。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的某些可能的实现方式中，所述终端设备确定用于接收下行信号或下行信道的第一波束，包括：该终端设备根据当前已激活的面板确定默认波束， 该默认波束为用于接收下行信号或下行信道的第一波束。
也就是说，终端设备可以根据当前已激活的面板自行确定第一波束，以使得所确定的第一波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束。
第二方面，提供了一种信号传输方法。具体地，该方法包括：终端设备确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第一波束，所述第一波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束；该终端设备通过所述第一波束发送所述上行信号或所述上行信道。
应理解，第二方面提供的方法可以由终端设备执行，也可以由配置于终端设备中的芯片执行。本申请对此不作限定。
基于上述技术方案，终端设备可以使用当前已激活的面板上的波束来发送上行信号或上行信道，可以避免面板激活带来的较大时延。终端设备即便要进行面板切换或波束切换，其带来的时延也远远减小。因此，有利于终端设备在调度的资源到来之前完成面板切换或波束切换，使用所选择的波束来发送上行信号或上行信道。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活，因此也可以达到节电效果。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的某些可能的实现方式中，所述终端设备确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第一波束，包括：该终端设备根据当前已激活的面板确定默认波束，该默认波束为用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第一波束。
也就是说，终端设备可以根据当前已激活的面板自行确定第一波束，以使得所确定的第一波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束。
结合第一方面或第二方面，在某些可能的实现方式中，该默认波束参考当前已激活的一个或多个面板上满足预设条件的波束。
在本申请实施例中，可以预先定义一个或多个预设条件，以便于终端设备从当前已激活的一个或多个面板上确定默认波束。其中，该预设条件可以例如可以是协议预定义的。本申请对于预设条件的具体内容不作限定。
下文列举了几种可选的参考波束。其中涉及的参数L、M和N分别满足：N≥1，1≤M≤N，1≤L≤N，L、M和N均为整数。
可选地，该默认波束参考第一时隙内使用的第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束，第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束是当前已激活的面板上的接收波束中与一个或多个控制资源集中标识ID最小的控制资源集对应的接收波束，且所述一个或多个控制资源集是所述终端设备在第一时隙内监测的控制资源集；所述第一时隙为一个或多个时隙中距离参考时隙最近的一个时隙，所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙中配置有一个或多个控制资源集，且所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙内配置的一个或多个资源集中至少有一个控制资源集的接收波束在当前已激活的面板上。
第一时隙满足：条件a)该第一时隙包含有终端设备监测的一个或多个控制资源集；条件b)该第一时隙中的一个或多个控制资源集中至少有一个控制资源集的接收波束在当前已激活的面板上；条件c)该第一时隙是满足上述条件a)和条件b)的一个或多个时隙中距离被调度的资源距离参考时隙最近的一个时隙。
该第一PDCCH满足：条件a)接收波束在当前已激活的面板上；条件b)终端设备在第一时隙内监测的一个或多个控制资源集中ID最小的控制资源集内传输的PDCCH。
需要说明的是，该第一时隙和参考时隙可以是不同的时隙，也可以是同一时隙。本申请对此不作限定。
可选地，该默认波束参考当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M次同步信号块的接收所使用的L个波束。
具体地，该默认波束至少可以参考：
当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的一次同步信号块的接收所使用的一个波束；或
当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的波束中，每个面板上距离参考时隙最近的一次同步信号块的接收所使用的波束，即，共N个波束；或
可选地，默认波束参考在激活的上行带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP)中当前已激活的N个面板上的、物理上行控制信道中标识最小的物理上行控制信道的发射所使用的波束。
其中，物理上行控制信道的标识例如可以是指物理上行控制信道资源的标识或者物理上行控制信道资源集的标识。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N个面板上的、物理上行控制信道中标识最小的物理上行控制信道的发射所使用的波束。
也就是说，该默认波束参考的波束也可以不是在激活的上行BWP中用于发射物理上行控制信道的波束。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束。
具体地，该默认波束至少可以参考：
当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的一次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的一个波束；或
当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，每个面板上距离参考时隙最近的一次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的波束，即，共N个波束；或
当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的N次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的波束，即，共L(1≤L≤N)个波束。
其中，用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束可以由下文所述的初始接入流程或随机接入流程确定，也可以由其他方式确定。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束。
即，上文列举的默认波束可参考的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束可以是由初始接入流程确定的。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束。
即，上文列举的默认波束可参考的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束可以是由随机接入流程确定的。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N个面板上第一同步信号块的接收所使用的波束，该第一同步信号块由初始接入流程确定。
与上文所述不同，该初始接入流程用于确定第一同步信号块，该第一同步信号块的接收波束可用做参考波束，以用于确定默认波束。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N个面板上用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M次的上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的L个波束。
具体地，默认波束参考至少可以参考：
当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的一次上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的一个波束；或
当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，每个面板上距离参考时隙最近的一次上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的波束，即，共N个波束；或
当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的N次上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的波束，即，共L(1≤L≤N)个波束。
其中，参考时隙可以是指被网络设备调度或触发的信号或信道的传输资源所在的时隙。该参考时隙例如可以是物理下行控制信道所在的时隙、或物理下行共享信道所在的时隙、或下行参考信号(如信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal，CSI-RS))的传输资源所在的时隙等。该参考时隙例如也可以是物理上行控制信道所在的时隙、或物理上行共享信道所在的时隙、或上行参考信号(如探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)的传输资源所在的时隙等。
需要说明的是，上文列举的默认波束所参考的波束可以是接收波束，也可以是发射波束。本申请对此并不做限定。默认波束可以参考接收波束来确定，也可以参考发射波束来确定。
结合第一方面或第二方面，在某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该第一波束。
也就是说，终端设备可以根据网络设备的指示来确定该第一波束。
第三方面，提供了一种波束指示方法。具体地，该方法包括：网络设备生成第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一波束；该第一波束是终端设备用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束，且该第一波束是该终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；该网络设备向该终端设备发送该第一指示信息。
应理解，第三方面提供的方法可以由网络设备执行，也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片执行。本申请对此不作限定。
基于上述技术方案，网络设备通过第一指示信息向终端设备指示第一波束，该第一波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。故可以使得终端设备使用当前已激活的面板上的波束来接收下行信号或下行信道，可以避免面板激活带来的较大时延。终端设备即便要进行面板切换或波束切换，其带来的时延也远远减小。因此，有利于终端设备在调度的资源到来之前完成面板切换或波束切换，使用所选择的波束来接收下行信号或下行信道。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活。如此一来，终端设备的所有面板不需要长时间处于激活状态，因此也可以达到节电效果。
第四方面，提供了一种波束指示方法。具体地，该方法包括：网络设备生成第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一波束；该第一波束是终端设备用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束，且该第一波束是该终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；该网络设备向该终端设备发送该第一指示信息。
应理解，第四方面提供的方法可以由网络设备执行，也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片执行。本申请对此不作限定。
基于上述技术方案，网络设备通过第一指示向终端设备指示第一波束，该第一波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。故可以使得终端设备使用当前已激活的面板上的波束来发送上行信号或上行信道，可以避免面板激活带来的较大时延。终端设备即便要进行面板切换或波束切换，其带来的时延也远远减小。因此，有利于终端设备在调度的资源到来之前完成面板切换或波束切换，使用所选择的波束来发送上行信号或上行信道。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活，因此也可以达到节电效果。
结合第一方面至第四方面，在某些可能的实现方式中，该第一指示信息携带在下行控制信息(downlink control information，DCI)、媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)-控制元素(control element，CE)和无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)消息的一项或多项中。
网络设备可以针对不同的下行信号或下行信道，采用不同的信令来指示第一波束。该第一指示信息例如携带在已有的信令中，如上文所述的DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中的一项或多项，也可以通过携带在新增的信令中。本申请对此不作限定。
应理解，DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息仅为便于理解而示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除采用其他信令来携带该第一指示信息的可能，也不排除对上述信令定义其他名称的可能。换句话说，该第一指示信息可以携带在物理层信令和高层信令的一项或多项中。
第五方面，提供了一种信号传输方法。具体地，该方法包括：终端设备确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第二波束，该第二波束与用于接收调度信道的第三波束为同一面板上的波束，该调度信道用于调度或触发该上行信号或上行信道；该终端设备通过该第二波束发送该上行信号或上行信道。
应理解，第五方面提供的方法可以由终端设备执行，也可以由配置于终端设备中的芯片执行。本申请对此不作限定。
其中，调度信道可以是用于调度上行资源以传输上行信号或上行信道的信道。例如，网络设备可以通过调度信道调度PUSCH，该调度信道例如可以是PDCCH。调度信道也可以用于触发上行信号或上行信道的传输。例如，网络设备可以通过调度信道触发非周期SRS的传输，该调度信道例如也可以是PDCCH。
应理解，调度信道仅为便于理解而定义，不应对本申请构成任何限定。在具体的上行信号或上行信道的传输中，调度信道可以是不同的信道。本申请对于用作调度信道的具体信道不作限定。基于上述技术方案，终端设备可以根据接收调度信道使用的第三波束所在的面板来确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第二波束。由于终端设备在接收调度信道时使用了第三波束，故该第三波束所在的面板是已激活的面板，在该面板上确定第二波束， 也就是在当前已激活的面板上确定第二波束。由此可以避免面板激活带来的较大时延。终端设备即便要进行面板切换或波束切换，其带来的时延也远远减小。因此，有利于终端设备在调度的资源到来之前完成面板切换或波束切换，使用所选择的波束来发送上行信号或上行信道。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活。如此一来，终端设备的所有面板不需要长时间处于激活状态，因此也可以达到节电效果。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该终端设备确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第二波束，包括：该终端设备根据该第三波束所在的面板确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第二波束。
也就是说，终端设备可以根据当前已激活的面板自行确定第二波束，以使得所确定的第一波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息，该第三指示信息指示用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第二波束。
也就是说，终端设备可以根据网络设备的指示来确定该第二波束。
第六方面，提供了一种波束指示方法。具体地，该方法包括：网络设备根据第三波束所在的面板确定第二波束，该第二波束与该第三波束为同一面板上的波束，该第二波束用于终端设备发送上行信号或上行信道的波束，该第三波束为用于该终端设备接收调度信道的波束，该调度信道用于调度或触发该上行信号或该上行信道；该网络设备向该终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息指示该第二波束。
应理解，第六方面提供的方法可以由网络设备执行，也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片执行。本申请对此不作限定。
其中，调度信道可以是用于调度上行资源以传输上行信号或上行信道的信道。例如，网络设备可以通过调度信道调度PUSCH，该调度信道例如可以是PDCCH。调度信道也可以用于触发上行信号或上行信道的传输。例如，网络设备可以通过调度信道触发非周期SRS的传输，该调度信道例如也可以是PDCCH。
应理解，调度信道仅为便于理解而定义，不应对本申请构成任何限定。在具体的上行信号或上行信道的传输中，调度信道可以是不同的信道。本申请对于用作调度信道的具体信道不作限定。
基于上述技术方案，网络设备通过第三指示信息向终端设备指示第二波束，该第二波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。故可以使得终端设备使用的第三波束所在的面板来确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第二波束。由于终端设备在接收调度信道时使用了第三波束，故该第三波束所在的面板是已激活的面板，该面板上的第二波束也就是在当前已激活的面板上的波束。由此可以避免面板激活带来的较大时延。终端设备即便要进行面板切换或波束切换，其带来的时延也远远减小。因此，有利于终端设备在调度的资源到来之前完成面板切换或波束切换，使用所选择的波束来发送上行信号或上行信道。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活。如此一来，终端设备的所有面板不需要长时间处于激活状态，因此也可以达到节电效果。
第七方面，提供了一种面板指示方法。具体地，该方法包括：终端设备在第一时间节点接收来自网络设备的面板激活命令，该面板激活命令用于激活一个或多个面板；该终端设备在第二时间节点收发信号；其中，该第一时间节点和第二时间节节点间的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长和正确接收该面板激活命令的时长之和。
应理解，第七方面提供的方法可以由终端设备执行，也可以由配置于终端设备中的芯片执行。
基于上述技术方案，终端设备可以根据网络设备的面板激活命令激活面板，通过限制第二时间节点与第一时间节点的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长和正确接收该面板激活命令的时长之和，可以保证终端设备在信号或信道的传输资源到达前完成面板切换，从而能够在信号或信道的传输资源到达时使用激活的面板上的波束收发信号。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活。如此一来，终端设备的所有面板不需要长时间处于激活状态，因此也可以达到节电效果。
第八方面，提供了一种面板指示方法。具体地，该方法包括：网络设备在第一时间节点向终端设备发送面板激活命令，该面板激活命令用于激活一个或多个面板；该网络设备在第二时间节点收发信号；其中，该第一时间节点和第二时间节点间的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长和该终端设备正确接收该面板激活命令的时长之和。
应理解，第八方面提供的方法可以由网络设备执行，也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片执行。
基于上述技术方案，网络设备通过面板激活命令激活终端设备的面板，并通过限制第二时间节点与第一时间节点的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长和正确接收该面板激活命令的时长之和，可以保证终端设备在信号或信道的传输资源到达前完成面板切换，从而能够在信号或信道的传输资源到达时使用激活的面板上的波束收发信号。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活。如此一来，终端设备的所有面板不需要长时间处于激活状态，因此也可以达到节电效果。
结合第七方面或第八方面，在某些可能的实现方式中，该面板激活命令为波束指示信息。
也就是说，该面板激活命令可以复用已有的信令。该波束指示信息所指示的波束与面板具有对应关系，该对应关系例如可以是预先定义的，如协议定义；也可以是终端设备预先上报给网络设备的。本申请对此不作限定。当网络设备通过波束指示信息指示了波束，也就间接地指示了需要激活的面板。
其中，该波束指示信息例如可以是上述第一方面至第四方面所述的第一指示信息，也可以是上述第五方面或第六方面中所述的第三指示信息。
结合第七方面或第八方面，在某些可能的实现方式中，该面板激活命令包括需要激活的一个或多个面板的指示。
也就是说，网络设备也可以通过已有的信令或新增的信令来指示需要激活的面板。网络设备例如可以直接指示需要激活的面板的指示，也可以指示与面板具有对应关系的其他标识，如参考信号资源等。本申请对此不作限定。
结合第七方面或第八方面，在某些可能的实现方式中，该面板激活命令配置在无线资源控制RRC消息、媒体接入控制信息元素MAC-CE和下行控制信息DCI的一项或多项中。
即，可以复用已有的信令来指示需要激活的面板，从而可以减小信令开销。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该终端设备接收面板切换命令，该面板切换命令用于指示切换至所述面板激活命令所激活的一个或多个面板中的部分或全部面板。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的某些可能的实现方式中，该方法还包括：该网络设备发送面板切换命令，该面板切换命令用于指示切换至上述面板激活命令所激活的一个或多个面板中的部分或全部面板。
网络设备可以在通过面板激活命令激活了终端设备的一个或多个面板之后，进一步通过面板切换命令通知终端设备，以使终端设备在激活面板之后，根据面板切换命令进行面板切换。
可选地，该面板激活命令和面板切换命令可以是同一个信令中的同一个字段，即，通过同一个字段完成激活和切换的指示。此情况下，网络设备所指示的需要激活的面板和需要切换的面板可以是相同的。终端设备可以将面板切换为激活的全部面板。
可选地，该面板激活命令和面板切换命令可以是同一个信令中的不同字段，即，通过不同的字段完成激活和切换的指示。此情况下，网络设备所指示的需要激活的面板和需要切换的面板可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。终端设备可以将面板切换为激活的全部或部分面板。
可选地，该面板激活命令和面板切换命令可以是不同的信令。此情况下，网络设备所指示的需要激活的面板和需要切换的面板可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。终端设备可以将面板切换为激活的全部或部分面板。
结合第七方面或第八方面，在某些可能的实现方式中，该面板切换命令为波束指示信息。
与上述面板激活命令相似，该面板切换命令可以复用已有的信令。如前所述该波束指示信息所指示的波束与面板具有对应关系，当网络设备通过波束指示信息指示了波束，也就间接地指示了需要切换的面板。
结合第七方面或第八方面，在某些可能的实现方式中，该面板切换命令包括需要切换的面板的指示。
与上述面板激活命令相似，该面板切换命令可以通过已有的信令或新增的信令来指示需要切换的面板。网络设备例如可以直接指示需要激活的面板的指示，也可以指示与面板具有对应关系的其他标识，如参考信号资源等。本申请对此不作限定。
结合第七方面或第八方面，在某些可能的实现方式中，该第一时间节点和第二时间节点间的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长、该终端设备正确接收该面板激活命令和终端设备正确接收该面板切换命令的时长之和。
需要说明的是，当面板激活命令和面板切换命令携带在同一信令中时，该终端设备正确接收该面板激活命令和终端设备正确接收该面板切换命令的时间可以是重合的，故第一时间节点和第二时间节点间的时间间隔可以简化为大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长、该终端设备正确接收该面板激活命令时长之和。
当终端设备能够在激活面板的同时接收信令，则第一时间节点和第二时间节点间的时间间隔也可以简化为大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长、该终端设备正确接收该面板激活命令时长之和。
结合第七方面或第八方面，在某些可能的实现方式中，该面板切换命令携带在RRC消息、MAC-CE和DCI的一项或多项中。
即，可以复用已有的信令来指示需要切换的面板，从而可以减小信令开销。
结合第七方面或第八方面，在某些可能的实现方式中，该终端设备在第二时间节点收发信号，包括：
所述终端设备在所述第二时间节点通过激活的面板上的波束收发信号。
由于限制了第二时间节点与第一时间节点的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长和正确接收该面板激活命令的时长之和，或，第二时间节点与第一时间节点的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长、正确接收该面板激活命令的时长和正确接收该面板切换命令的时长之和。因此，在信号或信道的传输资源到达之前，为了终端设备预留了充裕的时间进行面板切换，使得终端设备能够在信号或信道的传输资源到达前完成了面板切换，在该信号或信道的传输资源到达时使用激活的面板上的波束收发信号。
第九方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括用于执行第一方面、第二方面、第五方面或第七方面以及第一方面、第二方面、第五方面或第七方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。
第十方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合，可用于执行存储器中的指令，以实现上述第一方面、第二方面、第五方面或第七方面以及第一方面、第二方面、第五方面或第七方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地，该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地，该通信装置还包括通信接口，处理器与通信接口耦合。
在一种实现方式中，该通信装置为终端设备。当该通信装置为终端设备时，所述通信接口可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口。
在另一种实现方式中，该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片时，所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。
可选地，所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地，所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
第十一方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括用于执行第三方面、第四方面、第六方面或第八方面以及第三方面、第四方面、第六方面或第八方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。
第十二方面，提供了一种通信装置，包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合，可用于执行存储器中的指令，以实现上述第三方面、第四方面、第六方面或第八方面以及第三方面、第四方面、第六方面或第八方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地，该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地，该通信装置还包括通信接口，处理器与通信接口耦合。
在一种实现方式中，该通信装置为网络设备。当该通信装置为网络设备时，所述通信接口可以是收发器，或，输入/输出接口。
在另一种实现方式中，该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置 于网络设备中的芯片时，所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。
可选地，所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地，所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
第十三方面，提供了一种处理器，包括：输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路用于通过所述输入电路接收信号，并通过所述输出电路发射信号，使得所述处理器执行第一方面至第八方面以及第一方面至第八方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
在具体实现过程中，上述处理器可以为芯片，输入电路可以为输入管脚，输出电路可以为输出管脚，处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的，输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的，且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路，该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。
第十四方面，提供了一种处理装置，包括处理器和存储器。该处理器用于读取存储器中存储的指令，并可通过接收器接收信号，通过发射器发射信号，以执行第一方面至第八方面以及第一方面至第八方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
可选地，所述处理器为一个或多个，所述存储器为一个或多个。
可选地，所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起，或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。
在具体实现过程中，存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器，例如只读存储器(read only memory，ROM)，其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上，也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上，本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。
应理解，相关的数据交互过程例如发送指示信息可以为从处理器输出指示信息的过程，接收能力信息可以为处理器接收输入能力信息的过程。具体地，处理输出的数据可以输出给发射器，处理器接收的输入数据可以来自接收器。其中，发射器和接收器可以统称为收发器。
上述第十四方面中的处理装置可以是一个芯片，该处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现，当通过硬件实现时，该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等；当通过软件来实现时，该处理器可以是一个通用处理器，通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现，该存储器可以集成在处理器中，可以位于该处理器之外，独立存在。
第十五方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)，当所述计算机程序被运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第八方面以及第一方面至第八方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十六方面，提供了一种计算机可读介质，所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码，或指令)当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第八方面以及第一方面至第八方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十七方面，提供了一种通信系统，包括前述的网络设备和终端设备。
附图说明
图1是适用于本申请实施例的通信系统的示意性；
图2是本申请实施例提供的信号传输方法的示意性流程图；
图3是本申请实施例提供的通过RRC消息配置TCI状态列表、MAC-CE激活TCI状态以及DCI指示被选择的TCI状态的示意图；
图4是本申请实施例提供的通过RRC消息配置TCI状态列表以及MAC-CE激活TC状态的示意图；
图5和图6是本申请实施例提供的第一时隙和第一PDCCH的示意图；
图7是本申请实施例提供的确定参考波束的示意图；
图8是本申请另一实施例提供的信号传输方法的示意性流程图；
图9是本申请又一实施例提供的信号传输方法的示意性流程图；
图10是本申请再一实施例提供的信号传输方法的示意性流程图；
图11是本申请实施例提供的第一时间节点和第二时间节点的示意图；
图12是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图；
图13是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图；
图14是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合附图，对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：全球移动通讯(Global System for Mobile communications，GSM)系统、码分多址(Code Division Multiple Access，CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access，WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(General Packet Radio Service，GPRS)、长期演进(Long Term Evolution，LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(Frequency Division Duplex，FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex，TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System，UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access，WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th Generation，5G)通信系统或新无线接入技术(new radio Access Technology，NR)等。
为便于理解本申请实施例，首先结合图1详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。图1示出了适用于本申请实施例的发送和接收的方法和装置的通信系统的示意图。如图1所示，该通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备，例如图1所示的网络设备110；该通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备，例如图1所示的终端设备120。网络设备110与终端设备120可通过无线链路通信。各通信设备，如网络设备110或终端设备120，可以配置多个天线，该多个天线可以包括至少一个用于发送信号的发射天线和至少一个用于接收信号的接收天线。另外，各通信设备还附加地包括发射机链和接收机链，本领域普通技术人员可以理解，它们均可包括与信号发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器、解复用器或天线等)。因此，网络设备110与终端设备120可通过多天线技术通信。
应理解，该无线通信系统中的网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该设备包括但不限于：演进型节点B(evolved Node B，eNB)、无线网络控制器(Radio Network  Controller，RNC)、节点B(Node B，NB)、基站控制器(Base Station Controller，BSC)、基站收发台(Base Transceiver Station，BTS)、家庭基站(例如，Home evolved NodeB，或Home Node B，HNB)、基带单元(BaseBand Unit，BBU)，无线保真(Wireless Fidelity，WIFI)系统中的接入点(Access Point，AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point，TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point，TRP)等，还可以为5G，如，NR，系统中的gNB，或，传输点(TRP或TP)，5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板，或者，还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点，如基带单元(BBU)，或，分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)等。
在一些部署中，gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括射频单元(radio unit，RU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能，DU实现gNB的部分功能，比如，CU实现无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)，分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层的功能，DU实现无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control，MAC)层和物理(physical，PHY)层的功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息，或者，由PHY层的信息转变而来，因而，在这种架构下，高层信令，如RRC层信令，也可以认为是由DU发送的，或者，由DU+CU发送的。可以理解的是，网络设备可以为CU节点、或DU节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的设备。此外，CU可以划分为接入网(radio access network，RAN)中的网络设备，也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network，CN)中的网络设备，本申请对此不做限定。
还应理解，该无线通信系统中的终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment，UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。本申请的实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端等等。本申请的实施例对应用场景不做限定。
为便于理解本申请实施例，首先对本申请中涉及到的属于作简单说明。
1、波束，可以理解为空间滤波器(spatial filter)或空间参数(spatial parameters)。用于发送信号的波束可以称为发射波束(transmission beam，Tx beam)，可以为空间发送滤波器(spatial domain transmit filter)或空间发射参数(spatial transmit parameters，spatial Tx parameters)；用于接收信号的波束可以称为接收波束(reception beam，Rx beam)，可以为空间接收滤波器(spatial domain receive filter)或空间接收参数(spatial receive parameters，spatial Rx parameters)。
形成波束的技术可以是波束赋形技术或者其他技术。例如，波束赋形技术具体可以为数字波束赋形技术、模拟波束赋形技术或者混合数字/模拟波束赋形技术等。发射波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布，接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。
在NR协议中，波束例如可以是空间滤波器(spatial filter)。但应理解，本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他的术语来表示相同或相似的含义的可能。
2、天线面板：简称面板(panel)。每个天线面板可以配置一个或多个接收波束，以及一个或多个发射波束。因此，天线面板也可以理解为波束组。通信设备，如终端设备或网络设备，可以通过天线面板上的接收波束接收信号，也可以通过天线面板上的发射波束发射信号。
在本申请实施例中，对于终端设备来说，面板例如可以由上行参考信号的资源来区分。该上行参考信号例如可以是探测参考信号(sounding reference，SRS)。作为示例而非限定，一个天线面板可以对应于一个SRS资源集(resource set)标识(idendifier，ID)。也就是说，一个SRS resource set ID可用于指示一个面板。
对于网络设备来说，网络设备可以由面板ID来区分。例如，可以通过传输配置指示(transmission configuration indicator，TCI)来指示面板ID。
3、准共址(quasi-co-location，QCL)：或者称准同位。具有QCL关系的天线端口对应的信号中具有相同的参数，或者，一个天线端口的参数可用于确定与该天线端口具有QCL关系的另一个天线端口的参数，或者，两个天线端口具有相同的参数，或者，两个天线端口间的参数差小于某阈值。
其中，天线端口(antenna port)也可以简称端口，是指被接收端设备所识别的发射天线，或者在空间上可以区分的发射天线。针对每个虚拟天线可以配置一个天线端口，每个虚拟天线可以为多个物理天线的加权组合，每个天线端口可以与一个参考信号端口对应。
上述参数可以包括以下一项或多项：时延扩展(delay spread)，多普勒扩展(Doppler spread)，多普勒频移(Doppler shift)，平均时延(average delay)，平均增益和空间接收参数。其中，空间接收参数例如可以包括：到达角(angle of arrival，AOA)，平均AOA，AOA扩展，离开角(angle of departure，AOD)，平均离开角AOD，AOD扩展，接收天线空间相关性参数，发送天线空间相关性参数，发射波束，接收波束以及资源标识。
上述角度可以为不同维度的分解值，或不同维度分解值的组合。上述天线端口为具有不同天线端口编号的天线端口，和/或，具有相同天线端口号在不同时间和/或频率和/或码域资源内进行信息发送或接收的天线端口，和/或，具有不同天线端口号在不同时间和/或频率和/或码域资源内进行信息发送或接收的天线端口。上述资源标识可用于指示资源上的标识。资源标识例如可以包括CSI-RS资源标识、SRS资源标识、同步信号/同步信号块的资源标识、物理随机接入信道(physical random accesss channel，PRACH)上传输的前导序列的资源标识或解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal，DMRS)。
在NR协议中，QCL关系可以基于不同的参数分为以下四种类型：
类型A(type A)：多普勒频移、多普勒扩展、平均时延、时延扩展；
类型B(type B)：多普勒频移、多普勒扩展；
类型C(type C)：多普勒频移、平均时延；以及
类型D(type D)：空间接收参数。
本申请实施例所涉及的QCL为类型D的QCL。下文中在没有特别说明的情况下，QCL可以理解为类型D的QCL，即，基于空间接收参数定义的QCL。
当QCL关系指类型D的QCL关系时：下行信号的端口和下行信号的端口之间，或上 行信号的端口和上行信号的端口之间的QCL关系，可以是两个信号具有相同的AOA或AOD，用于表示具有相同的接收波束或发送波束。又例如对于下行信号和上行信号间或上行信号与下行信号的端口间的QCL关系，可以是两个信号的AOA和AOD具有对应关系，或两个信号的AOD和AOA具有对应关系，即可以利用波束互易性，根据下行接收波束确定上行发送波束，或根据上行发送波束确定下行接收波束。
具有空域QCL关系的端口上传输的信号还可以具有对应的波束，对应的波束包括以下至少之一：相同的接收波束、相同的发射波束、与接收波束对应的发射波束(对应于有互易的场景)、与发射波束对应的接收波束(对应于有互易的场景)。
具有空域QCL关系的端口上传输的信号还可以理解为使用相同的空间滤波器(spatial filter)接收或发送信号。空间滤波器可以为以下至少之一：预编码，天线端口的权值，天线端口的相位偏转，天线端口的幅度增益。
具有空域QCL关系的端口上传输的信号还可以理解为具有对应的波束对连接(beam pair link，BPL)，对应的BPL包括以下至少之一：相同的下行BPL，相同的上行BPL，与下行BPL对应的上行BPL，与上行BPL对应的下行BPL。
因此，空间接收参数(即，类型D的QCL)可以理解为用于指示接收波束的方向信息的参数。
4、波束配对关系，即，发射波束与接收波束之间的配对关系，也可以称为空间发射滤波器与空间接收滤波器之间的配对关系。在具有波束配对关系的发射波束和接收波束之间传输信号可以获得较大的波束赋形增益。
在一种实现方式中，发送端可通过波束扫描的方式发送参考信号，接收端也可通过波束扫描的方式接收参考信号。具体地，发送端可通过波束赋形的方式在空间形成不同指向性的波束，并可以在多个具有不同指向性的波束上轮询，以通过不同指向性的波束将参考信号发射出去，使得参考信号在发送波束所指向的方向上发射参考信号的功率可以达到最大。接收端也可通过波束赋形的方式在空间形成不同指向性的波束，并可以在多个具有不同指向性的波束上轮询，以通过不同指向性的波束接收参考信号，使得该接收端接收参考信号的功率在接收波束所指向的方向上可以达到最大。
通过遍历各发射波束和接收波束，接收端可基于接收到的参考信号进行信道测量，并将测量得到的结果通过CSI上报发送端。例如，接收端可以将参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power，RSRP)较大的部分参考信号资源上报给发送端，如上报参考信号资源的标识，以便发送端在传输数据或信令时采用信道质量较好的波束配对关系来收发信号。
5、参考信号与参考信号资源：参考信号可用于信道测量、信道估计或者波束质量监测等。参考信号资源可用于配置参考信号的传输属性，例如，时频资源位置、端口映射关系、功率因子以及扰码等，具体可参考现有技术。发送端设备可基于参考信号资源发送参考信号，接收端设备可基于参考信号资源接收参考信号。
本申请实施例中涉及的参考信号例如可以包括信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal，CSI-RS)、同步信号块(synchronization signal block，SSB)以及探测参考信号(SRS)。与此对应地，参考信号资源可以包括CSI-RS资源(CSI-RS resource)、SSB资源、SRS资源(SRS resource)。
为了区分不同的参考信号资源，每个参考信号资源可对应于一个参考信号资源的标识。例如，CSI-RS资源标识(CSI-RS resource indicator，CRI)、SSB资源标识(SSB resource indicator，SSBRI)、SRS资源索引(SRS resource index，SRI)。
需要说明的是，上述SSB资源也可以理解为同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block，SS/PBCH block)资源。在本申请实施例中，为便于区分和说明，在未作出特别说明的情况下，SSB资源和SS/PBCH block资源可以表示相同的含义，SSB资源和SS/PBCH block resource可以表示相同的含义。此外，在某些情况下，SSB也可以是指SSB资源。因此，SSB资源标识有时也可以称为SSB标识(SSB index)。
应理解，上文中列举的参考信号以及相应的参考信号资源仅为示例性说明，不应对本申请构成任何限定，本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他参考信号来实现相同或相似功能的可能。
在参考信号资源的配置信令中，可以通过不同的时域行为(time domain behavior)参数来指示不同的时域行为。作为示例而非限定，时域行为例如可以包括周期(periodic)、半持续(semi-persistent，SP)和非周期(aperiodic，AP)。
例如，基于不同的时域行为，CSI-RS可以包括：周期CSI-RS、非周期CSI-RS和半持续CSI-RS。基于不同的时域行为，SRS也可以包括：周期SRS、非周期SRS和半持续SRS。
6、传输配置指示(TCI)状态：可用于指示两种参考信号之间的QCL关系。TCI状态可用于终端设备确定下行信号或下行信道的接收波束。
每个TCI状态中可以包括参考信号资源标识。其中，参考信号资源标识例如可以为以下至少一项：非零功率(non-zero power，NZP)信道状态信息(channel state information reference signal，CSI-RS)资源标识(NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId)或SSB索引(SSB-Index)。
需要说明的是，每个TCI状态中的参考信号资源标识所指示的是在波束训练过程中所使用的参考信号资源。由于在波束训练过程中，网络设备可以基于不同的参考信号资源通过不同的发射波束发送参考信号，因此通过不同的发射波束发送的参考信号可以关联不同的参考信号资源；终端设备可以基于不同的参考信号资源通过不同的接收波束接收参考信号，因此通过不同的接收波束接收的参考信号也可以关联不同的参考信号资源。因此，在波束训练过程中，终端设备可以维护参考信号资源标识与接收波束的对应关系，网络设备可以维护参考信号资源标识与发射波束的对应关系。通过参考信号资源标识，便可以建立接收波束和发射波束之间的配对关系。
在此后的通信过程中，终端设备可以基于网络设备所指示的TCI状态确定接收波束，网络设备可以基于同一TCI状态确定发射波束。
应理解，这里所列举的TCI状态中所包含的信息仅为示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如，TCI状态中还可以包括服务小区的索引(ServeCellIndex)、带宽部分(band width part，BWP)标识(identifier，ID)等。由于本申请实施例不涉及服务小区和BWP，这里对此不作详细说明。
7、空间关系(spatial relation，SR)：也可以称为上行TCI(uplink TCI，UL TCI)。与上文所介绍的TCI相似，空间关系可以用于终端设备确定上行信号或上行信道的发射波束。
每个空间关系可以包括参考信号资源标识。其中，参考信号资源标识例如可以为以下任意一项：SSB索引(SSB-Index)、非零功率CSI-RS参考信号资源标识(NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceId)和SRS资源标识(SRS-ResourceId)。
其中，参考信号资源标识指的是在波束训练过程中所使用的参考信号资源。一个空间关系用于确定一个发送波束。终端设备可以在波束训练的过程中维护参考信号资源标识与发射波束的对应关系，网络设备可以在波束训练的过程中维护参考信号资源标识与接收波束的对应关系。通过参考信号资源标识，便可以建立起发射波束和接收波束之间的配对关系。
在此后的通信过程中，终端设备可以基于网络设备所指示的空间关系确定发射波束，网络设备可以基于同一空间关系确定接收波束。
此外，每个空间关系还可以包括功率控制信息。该功率控制信息例如可以包括以下至少一项：期望的接收功率、路损参考信号和路损补偿参数α。终端设备可以基于该功率控制信息确定使用怎样的发送功率发送上行信号。
应理解，这里所列举的空间关系中所包含的信息仅为示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如，空间关系中还可以包括服务小区的索引(ServeCellIndex)、带宽部分(band width part，BWP)标识(identifier，ID)等。由于本申请实施例不涉及服务小区和BWP，这里对此不作详细说明。
当网络设备通过调度信令为终端设备调度资源以用于传输信号时，可以通过调度信令指示终端设备的接收波束或发射波束。终端设备可以根据该调度信令中所指示的接收波束或发射波束确定是否需要进行面板切换。然而，终端设备切换面板需要花费2～3毫秒(ms)的时间。而终端设备需要切换的面板很有可能还处于去激活的状态，还需要先激活再切换。而激活面板所需花费的时间可能远远大于切换面板的时间。由于网络设备对于终端设备的面板的状态并不感知，网络设备发送调度信令的时间与所调度的资源的时间的间隔可能并不足以使得终端设备完成面板激活和切换。若网络设备调度的资源在终端设备的面板切换完成之前就已经到达，该资源上传输的信号就不能被及时接收或发送。
具体地，若该资源用于上行传输，则由于终端设备还未来得及完成面板切换，也就无法使用该面板上的发射波束来发送上行信号或上行信道。因此，该被调度的资源可能被浪费，并且上行传输可能会由于资源不足而需要调度更多的资源，导致较大的传输时延。
若该资源用于下行传输，则由于终端设备还未来得及完成面板切换，也就无法使用该面板上的接收波束来接收下行信号或下行信道。因此，该被调度的资源上被传输的下行信号或下行信道可能未被完整地接收到，可能需要通过重传等方式来实现下行信号或下行信道的成功接收，因此导致较大的传输时延，且资源的利用率低。
有鉴于此，本申请提供一种信号传输方法，以避免面板激活带来的时延，从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。
需要说明的是，在有些情况下，将面板激活和面板切换统称为面板切换，面板激活的时延和面板切换的时延记为面板切换的时延。本申请并不排除这种理解。下文示出的实施例，仅为便于理解，将面板激活和面板切换作为两个单独的概念来说明。而不应对本申请构成任何限定。
在介绍本申请实施例提供的方法之前，先做出以下几点说明。
第一，在本申请实施例中，“指示”可以包括直接指示和间接指示，也可以包括显式指示和隐式指示。将某一信息(如下文所述的配置信息)所指示的信息称为待指示信息，则具体实现过程中，对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种，例如但不限于，可以直接指示待指示信息，如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息，其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分，而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如，还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示，从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。
第二，在下文示出的实施例中，各术语及英文缩略语，如下行控制信息(DCI)、媒体接入控制控制元素(MAC-CE)、无线资源控制(RRC)、物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)、物理下行共享信道(physical downlink share channel，PDSCH)、物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel，PUCCH)、物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel，PUSCH)、控制资源集(control resource set，CORESET)、信道状态信息参考信号(CSI-RS)、探测参考信号(SRS)、同步信号/物理广播信道(SS/PBCH)、同步信号块(SSB)、传输配置指示(TCI)等，均为方便描述而给出的示例性举例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在已有或未来的协议中定义其它能够实现相同或相似功能的术语的可能。
第三，在下文示出的实施例中第一、第二以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分，并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如，区分不同的指示信息、不同的波束、不同的面板等。
第四，在下文示出的实施例中，“预先获取”可包括由网络设备信令指示或者预先定义，例如，协议定义。其中，“预先定义”可以通过在设备(例如，包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现，本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。
第五，本申请实施例中涉及的“保存”，可以是指的保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器，可以是单独的设置，也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器，处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器，也可以是一部分单独设置，一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质，本申请并不对此限定。
第六，本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议，例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议，本申请对此不做限定。
第七，“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A，B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a、b和c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a，或b，或c，或a和b，或a和c，或b和c，或a、b和c，其中a，b，c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
第八，本申请实施例中所提及的信号或信道的资源到达，具体可以是指信号或信道开 始发送的时间，或者，信号或信道开始接收的时间。
下面将结合附图详细说明本申请提供的信号传输方法和装置。
应理解，本申请的技术方案可以应用于无线通信系统中，例如，图1中所示的通信系统100。处于无线通信系统中的两个通信装置之间可具有无线通信连接关系，该两个通信装置中的一个通信装置可对应于图1中所示的终端设备120，如，可以为图1中所示的终端设备，也可以为配置于该终端设备中的芯片；该两个通信装置中的另一个通信装置可对应于图1中所示的网络设备110，如，可以为图1中所示的网络设备，也可以为配置于该网络设备中的芯片。
以下，不失一般性，以终端设备与网络设备之间的交互过程为例详细说明本申请实施例提供的信号传输方法。为便于理解，下文中将分别以下行和上行为例来分别说明本申请实施例提供的方法。
图2是从设备交互的角度示出的本申请实施例提供的信号传输方法200的示意性流程图。具体地，图2具体示出了下行信号或下行信道的传输方法。如图所示，图2中示出的方法200可以包括步骤210至步骤240。下面结合附图对方法200做详细说明。
在步骤210中，终端设备确定用于接收下行信号或下行信道的第一波束，该第一波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束。
为便于区分和理解，下文中将终端设备确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的第一波束记作第一接收波束。该第一接收波束可以是当前已激活的面板上的波束。
需要说明的是，第一接收波束可以是一个波束，也可以是多个波束。本申请对于第一接收波束包含的波束数量不作限定。此外，当前已激活的面板具体是指终端设备当前已激活的面板。当前已激活的面板可以是一个面板，也可以是多个面板。本申请对于当前已激活的面板的数量不作限定。当第一接收波束包含多个波束时，该多个波束可以是当前已激活的一个面板上的波束，也可以是当前已激活的多个面板上的波束。
其中，当前已激活的面板可以是指当前已上电的面板。与此相对，去激活的面板可以是指下电的面板。若要切换面板，首先需要对保证该面板已激活，或者说，已上电。
在本申请实施例中，第一接收波束可以由网络设备通过信令指示，也可以由终端设备自行确定。下面分别结合这两种不同的方式来详细说明终端设备确定第一接收波束的具体过程。
在一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备根据网络设备发送的第一指示信息来确定第一接收波束。可选地，该方法还包括步骤220：终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一接收波束。相应地，在步骤220中，网络设备向终端设备发送该第一指示信息。
网络设备可以通过隐式或显式的方式来向终端设备指示第一接收波束。该第一指示信息可以是已有信令的新增字段，也可以复用已有信令中的已有字段，还可以通过新增的信令来携带。本申请对此不作限定。
可选地，该第一指示信息携带在DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息的一项或多项中。
也就是说，网络设备可以通过DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中的某一项来指示第一接收波束，也可以通过DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中的两项或三项的结合来指示第一接收波束。
当网络设备通过DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中的两项或三项的结合来指示第一接收波束时，只要保证DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中的两项或三项的结合中的至少一项所确定的波束在终端设备已激活的面板上，便可以保证该第一指示信息所指示的第一接收波束在终端设备已激活的面板上。
可选地，步骤210具体包括：终端设备根据第一指示信息确定用于接收下行信号或下行信道的第一接收波束。
下面将结合具体的下行信号或下行信道的传输详细说明网络设备通过第一指示信息指示第一接收波束以及终端设备根据第一指示信息确定第一接收波束的具体方法。应理解，下文所示出的信令仅为示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除采用其他信令来指示第一接收波束的可能。
如前所述，在本申请示出的实施例中，TCI状态和空间关系中所指示的QCL类型均为Type D类型。也就是说，TCI状态和空间关系均用于确定空间关系。例如，终端设备可以根据TCI状态确定接收波束；终端设备可以根据空间关系确定发射波束。
作为一个可选的实施例，该下行信道为物理下行共享信道(physical downlink share channel，PDSCH)，该第一指示信息携带在DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
具体地，该DCI例如可以是用于调度PDSCH的DCI，也可以是用作其他用途的DCI，本申请对此不作限定。该DCI中可以包括传输配置指示(TCI)，该TCI可以指示一个被选择的TCI状态，该TCI状态可用于确定一个或多个接收波束。在本实施例中，由该TCI指示的被选择的TCI状态所确定的一个或多个接收波束为第一接收波束，可用于接收PDSCH。且该第一接收波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备可以通过格式1_1(format 1_1)的DCI(可以称为DCI format 1_1)为终端设备调度PDSCH。当终端设备接收到该DCI format 1_1的时间与PDSCH的资源到达的时间的偏移量大于或等于预定门限时，终端设备可以基于上述第一指示信息确定第一接收波束。其中，上述DCI format 1_1与第一指示信息可以为同一信令，也可以为不同的信令。本申请对此不作限定。
上述被选择的TCI状态可以是网络设备预先通过MAC-CE激活的一个或多个TCI状态中的一个。例如，网络设备可以为每个小区中的每个带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP)激活最多8个TCI状态。上述DCI中指示的TCI状态的ID例如可以是该MAC-CE激活的一个或多个TCI状态中的相对ID。例如，网络设备通过MAC-CE可以最多激活8个TCI状态，则网络设备可以在DCI中通过3个比特来指示被选择的TCI状态。相对于直接从TCI状态列表中指示被选择的TCI状态而言，可以减小比特开销。下文中为了简洁，对于相同或相似的情况不再举例说明。
可以理解的是，每个激活的TCI状态可用于确定一个或多个接收波束。进一步可选地，网络设备可以根据终端设备当前已激活的面板，确定激活的TCI状态。由一个或多个激活的TCI状态确定的接收波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。或者说，由任意一个激活的TCI状态确定的接收波束都可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
上述通过MAC-CE激活的一个或多个TCI状态可以是网络设备预先通过RRC消息为终端设备配置的TCI状态列表中的TCI状态。例如，网络设备可以通过RRC消息中的TCI状态增加模式列表(tci-StatesToAddModList)来为终端设备配置TCI状态列表。该TCI 状态列表中可以包括一个或多个TCI状态。例如，网络设备可以为每个小区中的每个BWP配置最多64个TCI状态。通过MAC-CE激活的一个或多个TCI状态可以理解为是该TCI状态列表的一个子集。
由于网络设备可以通过该RRC消息配置TCI状态列表中的每个TCI状态。例如，每个TCI状态中的参考信号资源标识、QCL类型等。当终端设备确定了被选择的TCI状态，便可以根据RRC消息中配置的TCI状态来确定将接收波束。
可以理解的是，该TCI状态列表中的每个TCI状态可用于确定一个或多个接收波束。进一步可选地，网络设备可以根据终端设备当前已激活的面板，确定TCI状态列表中的TCI状态。由TCI状态列表中的每个TCI状态所确定的接收波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。或者说，由TCI状态列表中的任意一个TCI状态所确定的接收波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
因此，在本实施例中，网络设备在为终端设备确定和指示第一接收波束时，只要保证RRC消息配置的TCI状态列表、MAC-CE激活的TCI状态和DCI指示的TCI状态中至少有一项所确定的波束在终端设备已激活的面板上，就可以保证终端设备用于接收PDSCH的第一接收波束在已激活的面板上。
图3示出了通过RRC消息配置TCI状态列表、MAC-CE激活TCI状态以及DCI指示被选择的TCI状态的示意图。
如图所示，每个参考信号(reference signal，RS)资源标识(如图中所示的RS 0-0至RS 0-63以及RS 1-0至RS 1-63)可对应一个TCI状态，也就可以确定一个或多个波束。图3中示出的各面板通过不同的参考信号资源来区分不同的波束。通过RRC消息配置的TCI状态列表中所有的TCI状态对应的波束可以都是或部分是激活的面板上的波束。通过MAC-CE激活的TCI状态是RRC消息配置的TCI状态列表的子集。由激活的TCI状态所确定的波束也可以都是激活的面板上的波束。最终通过DCI中TCI所指示的TCI状态所确定的波束是激活的面板上的波束。
应理解，图中各参考信号资源标识、TCI状态标识等均为便于理解而示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。需要说明的是，当RRC消息中配置的TCI状态列表仅包括一个TCI状态，终端设备可以直接根据RRC消息配置的TCI状态来确定第一接收波束。而不需要网络设备再通过MAC-CE来激活TCI状态列表中的部分TCI状态以及通过DCI来指示被选择的TCI状态。在这种情况下，上述第一指示信息可以仅携带在RRC消息中。
当RRC消息中配置的TCI状态列表仅包括n(1＜n≤8)个TCI状态，终端设备可以直接根据RRC消息配置的TCI状态确定激活的TCI状态，进而根据DCI来确定被选择的一个TCI状态。而不需要网络设备再通过MAC-CE来激活TCI状态列表中的部分TCI状态。在这种情况下，上述第一指示信息可以携带在DCI和RRC消息中。
当MAC-CE仅激活了一个TCI状态时，终端设备可以根据该MAC-CE激活的TCI状态来确定第一接收波束。而不需要网络设备再通过DCI来指示被选择的TCI状态。在这种情况下，上述第一指示信息可以携带在MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
应理解，上文所列举的特殊情况仅为一种可能的实现方式，而不应对本申请构成任何限定。在RRC消息中仅配置了一个或八个TCI状态或者MAC-CE中仅激活了一个TCI状态的情况下，网络设备仍然可以依次通过RRC消息、MAC-CE和DCI来指示第一接收 波束。
作为一个可选的实施例，该下行信道为物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)，该第一指示信息携带在MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
具体地，该MAC-CE可用于激活一个TCI状态，该激活的TCI状态用于确定一个或多个接收波束。该MAC-CE激活的TCI状态所确定的一个或多个接收波束为第一接收波束，可用于接收PDCCH。且该第一接收波束为终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
上述通过MAC-CE激活的TCI状态可以是网络设备预先通过RRC消息为终端设备配置的TCI状态列表中的TCI状态。由于上文实施例中已经对通过RRC消息配置TCI状态列表的过程做了详细说明，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
进一步可选地，网络设备可以根据终端设备当前已激活的面板，确定TCI状态列表中的TCI状态。由TCI状态列表中的每个TCI状态所确定的接收波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。或者说，由TCI状态列表中的任意一个TCI状态所确定的接收波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
因此，在本实施例中，网络设备在为终端设备确定和指示第一接收波束时，只要保证RRC消息配置的TCI状态列表和MAC-CE激活的TCI状态中至少有一项所确定的波束在终端设备已激活的面板上，就可以保证终端设备用于接收PDCCH的第一接收波束在已激活的面板上。
图4示出了通过RRC消息配置TCI状态列表以及MAC-CE激活TCI状态的示意图。
如图所示，每个参考信号资源标识可对应一个TCI状态，也就可以确定一个或多个波束。图4中示出的各面板通过不同的参考信号资源标识来区分不同的波束。网络设备通过RRC消息配置的TCI状态列表中的所有的TCI状态对应的波束可以都是或部分是激活的面板上的波束。网络设备通过MAC-CE激活的TCI状态是RRC消息配置的TCI状态列表的子集。本实施例中，由激活的TCI状态所确定的波束是激活的面板上的波束。
应理解，图中各参考信号资源标识、TCI状态标识等均为便于理解而示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。
需要说明的是，当该TCI状态列表中仅包括一个TCI状态时，该TCI状态列表中所包括的TCI状态即用于确定第一接收波束的TCI状态。此情况下，网络设备可以直接通过RRC消息指示第一接收波束，而不需要通过MAC-CE来激活TCI状态列表中的一个TCI状态。也就是说，该第一指示信息可以仅携带在RRC消息中。
作为一个可选的实施例，该下行信号为非周期CSI-RS，该第一指示信息携带在DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
具体地，该DCI可以是用于触发非周期CSI-RS传输的DCI，也可以是用作其他用途的DCI。本申请对此不作限定。
该DCI中可以包括一个被选择的NZP-CSI-RS资源集(NZP-CSI-RS resource set)的指示，该被选择的NZP-CSI-RS资源集中包括一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源(NZP-CSI-RS resource)。由于每个NZP-CSI-RS资源与一个TCI状态对应，故每个NZP-CSI-RS资源可用于确定一个或多个接收波束。因此，该DCI中指示的被选择的NZP-CSI-RS资源集可用于确定一个或多个接收波束。在本实施例中，由DCI指示的被选择的NZP-CSI-RS资源集确定的接收波束为第一接收波束，可用于接收非周期CSI-RS。且该第一接收波束是终端 设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
其中，NZP-CSI-RS资源与TCI状态的对应关系可以预先配置的，如协议定义，或者，网络设备预先通过信令配置。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备可以通过DCI触发非周期CSI-RS的传输。当终端设备接收到该DCI的时间与接收到该DCI所触发的非周期CSI-RS的时间的偏移量大于或等于预定门限时，终端设备可以基于上述第一指示信息确定第一接收波束。其中，上述用于触发非周期CSI-RS的传输的DCI与携带第一指示信息的DCI可以是同一DCI，也可以是不同的DCI。本申请对此不作限定。
上述被选择的NZP-CSI-RS资源集可以是网络设备预先通过MAC-CE激活的一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源集中的一个。上述DCI中指示的NZP-CSI-RS资源集的ID例如可以是该MAC-CE激活的一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源集中的相对ID。由此可以减小DCI中的比特开销。
可以理解的是，每个激活的NZP-CSI-RS资源集可用于确定一个或多个接收波束。进一步可选地，网络设备可以根据终端设备当前已激活的面板，确定激活的NZP-CSI-RS资源集。由一个或多个激活的NZP-CSI-RS资源集确定的接收波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。或者说，由任意一个激活的NZP-CSI-RS资源集确定的接收波束都可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
上述激活的一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源集可以网络设备预先通过RRC消息为终端设备配置的一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源集的子集。网络设备可以预先通过RRC消息为终端设备配置一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源集，并可以在每个NZP-CSI-RS资源集中配置对应的TCI状态。因此，终端设备在确定了被选择的NZP-CSI-RS资源集之后，便可以根据该RRC消息中配置的NZP-CSI-RS资源集对应的TCI状态确定接收波束。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备可以通过RRC消息为终端设备配置CSI-非周期触发状态列表(CSI-AperiodicTriggerStateList)。该CSI-非周期触发状态列表中可以包括一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源集。每个NZP-CSI-RS资源集可以包括一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源，每个NZP-CSI-RS资源可以对应一个TCI状态。该网络设备还可通过该RRC消息配置CSI-非周期触发状态列表中的每个NZP-CSI-RS资源对应的TCI状态。因此，网络设备配置的CSI-非周期触发状态列表可用于确定一个或多个接收波束。
进一步可选地，网络设备可以根据终端设备当前已激活的面板，确定为终端设备配置的NZP-CSI-RS资源集。由RRC消息配置的一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源集中的每个NZP-CSI-RS资源集所确定的接收波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。或者说，由RRC消息配置的任意一个NZP-CSI-RS资源集所确定的接收波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
因此，在本实施例中，网络设备在为终端设备确定和指示第一接收波束时，只要保证RRC消息配置的CSI-非周期触发状态列表、MAC-CE激活的NZP-CSI-RS资源集和DCI指示的NZP-CSI-RS资源集中至少有一项所确定的波束在终端设备已激活的面板上，就可以保证终端设备用于接收非周期CSI-RS的第一接收波束在已激活的面板上。
由于上文中已经结合图3示意性地说明了RRC消息配置TCI状态、MAC-CE激活TCI状态和DCI指示被选择的TCI状态的过程。本实施例中网络设备通过RRC消息配置 NZP-CSI-RS资源集与TCI状态的对应关系、MAC-CE激活NZP-CSI-RS资源集和DCI指示NZP-CSI-RS资源集的过程与之相似，为了简洁，这里不再附图说明。
需要说明的是，当RRC消息中配置的NZP-CSI-RS资源集仅包括一个NZP-CSI-RS资源集时，终端设备可以直接根据RRC消息配置的NZP-CSI-RS资源集确定第一接收波束，而不需要通过MAC-CE和DCI来指示被选择的NZP-CSI-RS资源集。此情况下，上述第一指示信息可以仅携带在RRC消息中。
当MAC-CE中激活的NZP-CSI-RS资源集仅包括一个NZP-CSI-RS资源集时，终端设备可以直接根据MAC-CE中激活的NZP-CSI-RS确定第一接收波束，而不需要通过DCI来指示被选择的NZP-CSI-RS资源集。此情况下，上述第一指示信息可以携带在MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
作为一个可选的实施例，该下行信号为半持续(semi persistent，SP)CSI-RS，该第一指示信息携带在MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
具体地，该MAC-CE中可以包括TCI状态的指示。该TCI状态的指示例如可以是TCI状态的标识(identifier，ID)。该MAC-CE中指示的TCI状态可用于确定一个或多个接收波束。在本实施例中，由该MAC-CE指示的TCI状态所确定的一个或多个接收波束为第一接收波束，可用于接收半持续CSI-RS。且该第一接收波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备可以通过MAC-CE可以激活半持续CSI-RS的传输。当终端设备接收到该MAC-CE的时间与接收到该MAC-CE所激活的半持续CSI-RS的时间的偏移量大于或等于预定门限时，终端设备可以基于上述第一指示信息确定第一接收波束。其中，激活半持续CSI-RS的传输的MAC-CE与上述携带第一指示信息的MAC-CE可以是同一信令，也可以是不同的信令，本申请对此不作限定。
此外，网络设备可以通过RRC消息配置一个或多个TCI状态。上述MAC-CE中所指示的TCI状态可以是RRC消息配置的一个或多个TCI状态的子集。终端设备确定了用于确定第一接收波束的TCI状态之后，便可以根据RRC消息配置的TCI状态确定第一接收波束。
因此，在本实施例中，网络设备在为终端设备确定和指示第一接收波束时，只要保证RRC消息配置的TCI状态和MAC-CE中指示的TCI状态中至少有一项所确定的波束在终端设备已激活的面板上，就可以保证终端设备用于接收半持续CSI-RS的第一接收波束在已激活的面板上。
作为一个可选的实施例，该下行信号为周期CSI-RS，该第一指示信息携带在RRC消息中。
具体地，该RRC消息可以为终端设备配置一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源集以及每个NZP-CSI-RS资源集对应的TCI状态。由于每个TCI状态可用于确定一个或多个接收波束，故该RRC消息配置的一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源集可用于确定一个或多个接收波束。在本实施例中，由RRC消息配置的一个或多个NZP-CSI-RS资源集所确定的一个或多个接收波束为第一接收波束，可用于接收周期CSI-RS。且该第一接收波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
以上，结合下行信号或下行信道的传输详细说明了网络设备通过第一指示信息指示第 一接收波束以及终端设备根据第一指示信息确定第一接收波束的具体方法。但应理解，上文所列举的实施例仅为示例，本申请对于下行信号和下行信道的类型并不限定，本申请对于下行信号或下行信道的调度或触发传输的具体方法也不做限定。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备可以自行确定第一接收波束。可选地，步骤210具体包括：终端设备根据当前已激活的面板确定默认波束，并将该默认波束作为用于接收下行信号或下行信道的第一接收波束。
可选地，该默认波束参考当前已激活的一个或多个面板上满足预设条件的波束。
也就是说，终端设备可以从当前已激活的一个或多个面板上寻找满足预设条件的波束作为默认波束。该预设条件例如可以是预先定义的，如协议定义。网络设备和终端设备可以根据预先定义的预设条件和终端设备当前已激活的面板来确定默认波束。
其中，默认波束参考当前已激活的一个或多个面板上满足预设条件的波束，具体可以是指，默认波束可以与当前已激活的一个或多个面板上满足预设条件的波束具有相同的空间接收参数。该空间接收参数具体包含的参数可以参考上文列举，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
下文中为方便区分和说明，将默认波束所参考的波束记作参考波束。参考波束即为上文所述的当前已激活的面板上满足预设条件的波束。默认波束可以是参考波束，也可以是根据参考波束确定的波束。本申请对此不作限定。
可选地，默认波束参考第一时隙内使用的第一PDCCH的接收波束，第一PDCCH的接收波束是当前已激活的面板上的接收波束中与一个或多个控制资源集中标识ID最小的控制资源集对应的接收波束，且所述一个或多个控制资源集是所述终端设备在第一时隙内监测的控制资源集；所述第一时隙为一个或多个时隙中距离参考时隙最近的一个时隙，所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙中配置有一个或多个控制资源集，且所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙内配置的所述一个或多个资源集中至少有一个控制资源集的接收波束在当前已激活的面板上。。
换句话说，该参考波束满足的预设条件包括：在第一时隙内且是用于接收第一PDCCH的波束。
其中，参考时隙可以是指被网络设备调度或触发的信号或信道的传输资源所在的时隙。在本实施例中，该参考时隙例如可以是物理下行控制信道所在的时隙、或物理下行共享信道所在的时隙、或下行参考信号(如信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal，CSI-RS))的传输资源所在的时隙等。下文中为了简洁，省略对相同或相似情况的说明。
在本实施例中，该第一时隙和参考时隙可以是不同的时隙，也可以是同一时隙。本申请对此不作限定。
具体地，该第一时隙满足：条件a)该第一时隙包含有终端设备检测的一个或多个控制资源集；条件b)该第一时隙中的一个或多个控制资源集中至少有一个控制资源集的接收波束在当前已激活的面板上；条件c)该第一时隙是满足上述条件a)和条件b)的一个或多个时隙中距离被调度的资源距离参考时隙最近的一个时隙。
该第一PDCCH满足：条件a)接收波束在当前已激活的面板上；条件b)终端设备在第一时隙内监测的一个或多个控制资源集中ID最小的资源集传输的PDCCH。
在确定了第一时隙之后，便可以确定第一PDCCH，进而可以确定第一PDCCH的接收波束。
为便于理解，下面结合附图详细说明第一时隙和第一PDCCH。图5和图6是本申请实施例提供的第一时隙和第一PDCCH的示意图。
先看图5，图中示出了4个时隙，包括时隙0、时隙1、时隙2和时隙3。其中，时隙0中配置有控制资源集#1，时隙1中配置有控制资源集#2，时隙2中未配置控制资源集，时隙3中配置有用于传输信号或信道的资源。在下行传输中，该资源可以是网络设备调度的用于传输下行信号或下行信道的资源。
其中，时隙0中控制资源集#1的接收波束在面板0上，时隙1中控制资源集#2的接收波束在面板1上。
若面板0和面板1均为终端设备已激活的面板，由于时隙1距离网络设备调度的用于传输信号或信道的资源最近，则图5中示出的时隙1为第一时隙。该时隙1中控制资源集#2中传输的PDCCH为第一PDCCH。终端设备可以将面板1上接收第一PDCCH的波束确定为参考波束，并可以进一步根据该参考波束确定默认波束，并将该默认波束确定为第一接收波束。
当终端设备参考该第一PDCCH的接收波束来确定默认波束时，可以将用来接收第一PDCCH的波束作为默认波束，也可以根据用来接收第一PDCCH的波束的空间接收参数来确定默认波束。终端设备根据参考波束来确定默认波束的具体方法可以参考现有技术，为了简洁，这里省略对该具体方法的详细说明。
若面板1未激活，面板0已激活，则可将时隙1排除。此时，时隙0距离网络设备调度的用于传输信号或信道的资源最近，则图5中示出的时隙0为第一时隙；该时隙0中控制资源集#1中传输的PDCCH为第一PDCCH。终端设备可以将面板0上接收第一PDCCH的波束确定为参考波束，并可以进一步根据该参考波束确定默认波束，并将该默认波束确定为第一接收波束。
再看图6，图中示出了4个时隙，包括时隙0、时隙1、时隙2和时隙3。其中，时隙0中配置有控制资源集#1，时隙1中配置有控制资源集#2和控制资源集#3，时隙2中未配置控制资源集，时隙3中配置用于传输信号或信道的资源。在下行传输中，该资源可以是网络设备调度的用于传输下行信号或下行信道的资源。
其中，时隙0中控制资源集#1的接收波束在面板0上，时隙1中控制资源集#2的接收波束在面板1上，控制资源#3的接收波束在面板0上。
若面板0和面板1均为终端设备已激活的面板，由于时隙1距离网络设备调度的用于传输信号或信道的资源最近，则图6中示出的时隙1为第一时隙。该时隙1中，控制资源集#2的ID小于控制资源集#3的ID，则由控制资源集#2传输的PCCCH为第一PDCCH。
终端设备可以将面板1上接收第一PDCCH的波束确定为参考波束，并可以进一步根据该参考波束确定默认波束，并将该默认波束确定为第一接收波束。
若面板1未激活，面板0已激活，由于时隙1距离网络设备调度的用于传输信号或信道的资源最近，则图6中示出的时隙1为第一时隙。该时隙1中，由于控制资源集#2的接收波束在未激活的面板1上，控制资源#3的接收波束在已激活的面板0上，则控制资源集#3中传输的PDCCH为第一PDCCH。
终端设备可以将面板0上接收第一PDCCH的波束确定为参考波束，并可以进一步根据该参考波束确定默认波束，并将该默认波束确定为第一接收波束。
应理解，上文仅为便于理解第一时隙和第一PDCCH，结合附图举例说明了第一时隙和第一PDCCH。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于终端设备确定第一PDCCH的接收波束的具体方法不作限定。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N，且M为整数)次同步信号块的接收所使用的L(1≤L≤N，且L为整数)个波束。
其中，L可以为1，也可以为N，还可以为M。
具体地，该默认波束至少可以参考以下列举的i、ii和iii中的一种。
i)、当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的N个波束中，距离参考时隙最近的一次同步信号块的接收所使用的一个波束。此情况下，L为1，且M为1。
ii)、当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的N个波束中，每个面板上距离参考时隙最近的一次同步信号块的接收所使用的波束，即，共N个波束。此情况下，L为N，且M为N。
iii)、当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的N个波束中，距离参考时隙最近的N次同步信号块的接收所使用的波束，即，共L个波束。此情况下，1≤L≤N，M为N。
应理解，上文列举的默认波束可参考的波束的三例仅为示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如，在iii中，距离参考时隙最近的N次也可以替换为距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N)次。为了简洁，这里不再一一列举。
为便于理解，下面结合图7详细说明参考波束。图7是本申请实施例提供的确定参考波束的示意图。为便于理解，假设每个面板在一个时刻可以打出一个接收波束。如图所示，当前已激活的面板数N为4，N个已激活的面板包括面板0、面板1、面板2和面板3。每个已激活的面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的波束为一个。由随机接入流程可以确定，在t 0至t 5这六个时刻，该4个已激活的面板上的共4个用于接收同步信号块的波束。该4个面板上的波束按照距离用于传输信号或信道的资源的时间间隔由小到大的顺序依次为：t 5时刻面板1上用于接收同步信号块的波束、t 4时刻面板0上用于接收同步信号块的波束、t 3时刻面板2上用于接收同步信号块的波束、t 2时刻面板3上用于接收同步信号块的波束、t 1时刻面板0上用于接收同步信号块的波束、t 0时刻面板1上用于接收同步信号块的波束。
若默认波束参考上述i)中所述的波束，参考波束是该4个面板中最近一次同步信号块的接收所使用的波束是由随机接入流程确定的t 5时刻面板1上用于接收同步信号块的波束。则默认波束可以参考由随机接入流程确定的t 5时刻面板1上用于接收同步信号块的波束。
若默认波束参考上述ii)中所述的波束，则该4个面板中的每个面板的默认波束参考各自面板上的参考波束。每个面板上的参考波束是由随机接入流程确定的、各自最近一次用于接收同步信号块的波束。该4个面板中每个面板上由随机接入流程确定的最近一次同 步信号块的接收所使用的波束分别是：t 1时刻面板0上用于接收同步信号块的波束、t 5时刻面板1上用于接收同步信号块的波束、t 2时刻面板2上用于接收同步信号块的波束、t 3时刻面板3上用于接收同步信号块的波束。则该4个面板上每个面板上的默认波束可以分别参考上述4个波束。
若默认波束参考上述iii)中所述的波束，参考波束是该4个面板中由随机接入流程确定的最近4次同步信号块的接收所使用的波束。该4个面板中由随机接入流程确定的最近4次同步信号块的接收所使用的波束分别是：t 5时刻面板1上用于接收同步信号块的波束、t 4时刻面板1上用于接收同步信号块的波束、t 3时刻面板3上用于接收同步信号块的波束、t 2时刻面板2上用于接收同步信号块的波束。则默认波束可以参考上述3个波束。
应理解，图7仅为便于理解而示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于终端设备当前已激活的面板个数、每个面板上的波束个数、各面板接收同步信号块的先后顺序均不作限定。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M次同步信号块的接收所使用的L个波束。
具体地，该默认波束至少可以参考以下列举的i、ii和iii中的一种。
i)、当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的N个波束中，距离参考时隙最近的一次同步信号块的接收所使用的一个波束；或
ii)、当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的N个波束中，每个面板上距离参考时隙最近的一次同步信号块的接收所使用的波束，即，共N个波束；或
iii)、当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的N个波束中，距离参考时隙最近的N次同步信号块的接收所使用的波束，即，共L个波束。
关于L、M和N的关系以及确定参考波束的方法在上文中已经结合图7做了详细说明，本实施例确定参考波束的方法与之相同，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
应理解，上文列举的默认波束可参考的波束的三例仅为示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如，在iii中，距离参考时隙最近的N次也可以替换为距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N)次。为了简洁，这里不再一一列举。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上用于接收同步信号块的波束中，最近M(1≤M≤N，且M为整数)次同步信号块的接收所使用的L(1≤L≤N，且L为整数)个波束。
也就是说，默认波束在参考当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收同步信号块的波束中距离参考时隙最近的M次同步信号块的接收所使用的L个波束时，用于接收同步信号块的波束并不一定由随机接入流程或初始接入流程确定，也可以由其他方式确定。本实施例对此不作限定。
关于L、M和N的关系以及确定参考波束的方法在上文中已经结合图7做了详细说明，本实施例确定参考波束的方法与之相同，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
可选地，默认波束参考在激活的上行BWP中，当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束。
具体地，默认波束参考的波束可以满足：1)在当前已激活的N个面板上；2)用于在 激活的上行BWP中发送ID最小的物理上行控制信道。
其中，物理上行控制信道的ID具体可以是指物理上行控制信道资源(PUCCH resource)的ID，也可以是指物理上行控制信道资源集(PUCCH resource set)的ID。与之对应地，ID最小的物理上行控制信道可以是指ID最小的物理上行控制信道资源，或ID最小的物理上行控制信道资源集。
以物理上行控制信道的ID为物理上行控制信道资源的ID为例，终端设备可以根据为激活的上行BWP配置的物理上行控制信道资源的ID，确定ID最小的物理上行控制信道资源。当该ID最小的物理上行控制信道资源上传输的物理上行控制信道的发射波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束时，可以将该发射波束确定为参考波束；当该ID最小的物理上行控制信道资源的发射波束不是当前已激活的面板上的波束时，可以按照ID由小到大的顺序继续寻找，直到找到一个物理上行控制信道资源上传输的物理上行控制信道的发射波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束位置。可选地，默认波束参考在当前已激活的N个面板上的物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发射所使用的波束。
也就是说，默认波束参考的波束也并仅不限于在激活的上行BWP发送物理上行控制信道所使用的波束，也可以是在非激活的上行BWP中发送物理上行控制信道所使用的波束。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N，且M为整数)次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L(1≤L≤N，且L为整数)个波束。
具体地，默认波束至少可以参考以下列举的i、ii和iii中的一种。
i)、当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的一次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的一个波束。此情况下，L为1，且M为1。
ii)、当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，每个面板上距离参考时隙最近的一次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的波束，即，共N个波束。此情况下，L为N，且M为N。
iii)、当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的N次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的波束，即，共L个波束。此情况下，1≤L≤N，M为N。
应理解，上文列举的默认波束可参考的波束的三例仅为示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如，在iii中，距离参考时隙最近的N次也可以替换为距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N)次。为了简洁，这里不再一一列举。
上文列举的i、ii和iii中所述的波束分别为三种不同的方式所确定的参考波束。由于上文中结合图7详细说明了i、ii和iii中所述的波束，本实施例中所述的参考波束与之相似，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N，且M为整数)次上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的L(1≤L≤N，且L为整数)个波束。
具体地，默认波束至少可以参考以下列举的i、ii和iii中的一种。
i)、当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的一次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的一个波束。此情况下，L为1，且M为1。
ii)、当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，每个面板上距离参考时隙最近的一次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的波束，即，共N个波束。此情况下，L为N，且M为N。
iii)、当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的N次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的波束，即，共L个波束。此情况下，1≤L≤N，M为N。
应理解，上文列举的默认波束可参考的波束的三例仅为示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如，在iii中，距离参考时隙最近的N次也可以替换为距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N)次。为了简洁，这里不再一一列举。
上文列举的i、ii和iii中所述的波束分别为三种不同的方式所确定的参考波束。由于上文中结合图7详细说明了i、ii和iii中所述的波束，本实施例中所述的参考波束与之相似，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N，且M为整数)次上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的L(1≤L≤N，且L为整数)个波束。
具体地，默认波束至少可以参考以下列举的i、ii和iii中的一种。
i)、当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的一次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的一个波束。此情况下，L为1，且M为1。
ii)、当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，每个面板上距离参考时隙最近的一次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的波束，即，共N个波束。此情况下，L为N，且M为N。
iii)、当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的N次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的波束，即，共L个波束。此情况下，1≤L≤N，M为N。
应理解，上文列举的默认波束可参考的波束的三例仅为示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如，在iii中，距离参考时隙最近的N次也可以替换为距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N)次。为了简洁，这里不再一一列举。
上文列举的i、ii和iii中所述的波束分别为三种不同的方式所确定的参考波束。由于上文中结合图7详细说明了i、ii和iii中所述的波束，本实施例中所述的参考波束与之相似，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N个面板上第一同步信号块的接收波束，所述第一同步信号块由初始接入流程确定。
与上文所述不同，该初始接入流程用于确定第一同步信号块，该第一同步信号块的接收波束可用做参考波束，以用于确定默认波束。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上用于发送上行信 号或上行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N，且M为整数)次上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的L(1≤L≤N，且L为整数)个波束。
具体地，默认波束至少可以参考以下列举的i、ii和iii中的一种。
i)、当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的一次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的一个波束。此情况下，L为1，且M为1。
ii)、当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，每个面板上距离参考时隙最近的一次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的波束，即，共N个波束。此情况下，L为N，且M为N。
iii)、当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的N次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的波束，即，共L个波束。此情况下，1≤L≤N，M为N。
应理解，上文列举的默认波束可参考的波束的三例仅为示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如，在iii中，距离参考时隙最近的N次也可以替换为距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N)次。为了简洁，这里不再一一列举。
上文列举的i、ii和iii中所述的波束分别为三种不同的方式所确定的参考波束。由于上文中结合图7详细说明了i、ii和iii中所述的波束，本实施例中所述的参考波束与之相似，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
需要说明的是，上文列举的参考波束可以是接收波束，也可以是发射波束。本申请对此并不做限定。默认波束可以参考接收波束来确定，也可以参考发射波束来确定。
还需要说明的是，终端设备根据默认波束确定第一接收波束的方案可以适用于网络设备没有指示波束的场景，如网络设备未发送上述第一指示信息来指示第一接收波束，该场景具体可以通过高层参数来指示，如通过高层参数tci-PresentInDCI来指示，若该高层参数tci-PresentInDCI被设置为去使能(disabled)，则认为网络设备不会向终端设备指示波束；该场景也可以通过DCI格式来确定，如用于调度PDSCH的DCI若为DCI format 1_1，则认为网络设备会向终端设备指示波束；用于调度PDSCH的DCI若为DCI format 1_0，则认为网络设备不会向终端设备指示波束。终端设备根据默认波束确定第一接收波束的方案也可以适用于网络设备发送调度信令的时间与所调度的下行信号或下行信道的传输资源的时间的偏移量小于预定门限的场景。
还应理解，上文中结合不同的预设条件列举了多种不同方式确定的参考波束。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于终端设备确定参考波束的具体方式并不做限定。此外，上文列举了满足不同的预设条件的参考波束。这也不应对本申请构成任何限定。只要参考波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束，均应落入本申请的保护范围内。
在步骤230中，终端设备通过该第一接收波束接收下行信号或下行信道。相应地，网络设备通过与第一接收波束对应的发射波束发送该下行信号或下行信道。
如前所述，终端设备可以根据网络设备发送的第一指示信息确定第一接收波束，也可以自行确定第一接收波束。由于波束配对关系，网络设备也需使用与第一接收波束对应的发射波束来发送下行信号或下行信道。因此，无论是否由网络设备发送第一指示信息来指示第一接收波束，网络设备都需要知道终端设备当前已激活的面板，以便确定与第一接收 波束对应的发射波束。
可选地，该方法还包括步骤240，终端设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示当前已激活的面板。相应地，网络设备接收该第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备当前已激活的面板。
具体地，终端设备可以将当前已激活的面板的ID上报网络设备，或者，也可以将当前已激活的面板相关联的信息上报给网络设备。例如，与面板相关联的信息可以是参考信号资源标识，如CSI-RS资源的ID或CSI-RS资源集的ID；或者，与面板相关联的信息可以是TCI状态，如TCI状态的ID。为了简洁，这里不一一列举。本申请对于第二指示信息中所携带的具体信息不作限定。
另外，由于终端设备通过第一接收波束接收下行信号或下行信道的具体过程可以与现有技术相同，为了简洁，这里省略对该具体过程的详细说明。
基于上述技术方案，终端设备可以使用当前已激活的面板上的波束来接收下行信号或下行信道，可以避免面板激活带来的较大时延。终端设备即便要进行面板切换或波束切换，其带来的时延也远远减小。因此，有利于终端设备在调度的资源到来之前完成面板切换或波束切换，使用所选择的波束来接收下行信号或下行信道。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活。如此一来，终端设备的所有面板不需要长时间处于激活状态，因此也可以达到节电效果。
上文中结合图2至图7详细说明了本申请实施例提供的信号传输方法用于下行传输的具体过程。下文将结合图8详细说明本申请实施例提供的信号传输方法用于上行传输的具体过程。
图8是本申请另一实施例提供的信号传输方法300的示意性流程图。具体地，图8具体示出了上行信号或上行信道的传输方法。如图所示，图8中示出的方法300可以包括步骤310至步骤340。下面结合附图对方法300做详细说明。
在步骤310中，终端设备确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第一波束，该第一波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束。
为便于区分和理解，下文中将终端设备确定的用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第一波束记作第一发射波束。该第一发射波束可以是当前已激活的面板上的波束。
需要说明的是，第一发射波束可以是一个波束，也可以是多个波束。本申请对于第一发射波束包含的波束数量不作限定。此外，当前已激活的面板具体是指终端设备当前已激活的面板。当前已激活的面板可以是一个面板，也可以是多个面板。本申请对于当前已激活的面板的数量不作限定。当第一发射波束包含多个波束时，该多个波束可以是当前已激活的一个面板上的波束，也可以是当前已激活的多个面板上的波束。
在本申请实施例中，第一发射波束可以由网络设备通过信令指示，也可以由终端设备自行确定。下面分别结合这两种不同的方式来详细说明终端设备确定第一发射波束的具体过程。
在一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备根据网络设备发送的第一指示信息来确定第一发射波束。可选地，该方法还包括步骤320：终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一发射波束。相应地，在步骤320中，网络设备向终端设备发送第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第一发射波束。
网络设备可以通过隐式或显式的方式来向终端设备指示第一发射波束。该第一指示信息可以是已有信令的新增字段，也可以复用已有信令中的已有字段，还可以通过新增的信令来携带。本申请对此不作限定。
可选地，该第一指示信息携带在DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息的一项或多项中。
也就是说，网络设备可以通过DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中的某一项来指示第一接收波束，也可以通过DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中的两项或三项的结合来指示第一接收波束。
可选地，步骤310具体包括：终端设备根据第一指示信息确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第一接收波束。
下面将结合具体的下行信号或下行信道的传输详细说明网络设备通过第一指示信息指示第一发射波束以及终端设备根据第一指示信息确定第一发射波束的具体方法。应理解，下文所示出的信令仅为示例，不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除采用其他信令来指示第一发射波束的可能。
作为一个可选的实施例，该上行信道为PUSCH，该第一指示信息携带在DCI和RRC消息中。
具体地，该DCI中可以包括SRS资源指示(SRS resource indicator)，该SRS资源指示用于指示一个被选择的SRS资源，该SRS资源对应一个发射波束。该SRS资源所对应的发射波束可以由网络设备预先通过RRC消息配置的SRS资源与空间关系的对应关系确定。换句话说，DCI通过SRS资源指示字段间接地指示了被选择的发射波束。该被选择的发射波束为第一发射波束。
在本实施例中，由该DCI中指示的SRS资源所确定的发射波束为第一发射波束，可用于发送PUSCH。且该第一发射波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备可以通过格式0_1(format 0_1)的DCI(可以称为DCI format 0_1)为终端设备调度PUSCH。当终端设备接收到该DCI format 0_1的时间与PUSCH的资源到达的时间的大于或等于预定门限时，终端设备可以基于上述第一指示信息确定第一发射波束。其中，上述DCI format 0_1与第一指示信息可以为同一信令，也可以为不同的信令。本申请对此不作限定。
可以理解的是，网络设备通过RRC消息配置的SRS资源与空间关系的对应关系中，每个空间关系都可用于确定一个发射波束。换句话说，每个SRS资源可对应一个发射波束。也就是说，网络设备可以通过RRC消息配置一个或多个发射波束。进一步可选地，网络设备可以根据终端设备当前已激活的面板，确定通过RRC消息配置的SRS资源与空间关系的对应关系。由RRC消息配置的SRS资源与空间关系的对应关系中，每个SRS资源所确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。或者说，由RRC消息配置的SRS资源与空间关系的对应关系中，任意一个SRS资源所确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
因此，在本实施例中，网络设备在为终端设备确定和指示第一发射波束时，只要保证RRC消息配置的SRS对应的空间关系和DCI指示的空间关系中至少有一项所确定的波束在终端设备已激活的面板上，就可以保证终端设备用于发送PUSCH的第一发射波束在已激活的面板上。
需要说明的是，当RRC消息中仅配置了一个SRS资源与空间关系的对应关系时，终端设备可以直接根据该RRC消息配置的对应关系来确定第一发射波束。而不需要网络设备再通过DCI来指示一个SRS资源来确定对应的发射波束。在这种情况下，上述第一指示信息可以是RRC消息。
作为一个可选的实施例，该上行信道为PUSCH，该第一指示信息携带在DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
具体地，该DCI例如可以是用于调度PUSCH的DCI，也可以是用作其他用途的DCI。本申请对此不作限定。该DCI中可以包括空间关系指示。该空间关系指示例如可以是该空间关系的ID。该空间关系指示用于指示一个被选择的空间关系，故该DCI中所指示的空间关系用于确定一个或多个发射波束。在本实施例中，由DCI指示的空间关系所确定的一个或多个发射波束为第一发射波束，可用于发送PUSCH。且该第一发射波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
上述被选择的空间关系可以是网络设备预先通过MAC-CE激活的一个或多个空间关系中的一个。上述DCI中指示的空间关系的ID例如可以是该MAC-CE激活的一个或多个空间关系中的相对ID。由此可以减小DCI中的比特开销。
可以理解的是，每个激活的空间关系可用于确定一个或多个发射波束。进一步可选地，网络设备可以根据终端设备当前已激活的面板，确定激活的空间关系。有一个或多个激活的空间关系确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。或者说，由任意一个激活的空间关系确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
上述通过MAC-CE激活的一个或多个空间关系可以是网络设备预先通过RRC消息为终端设备配置的空间关系列表中的空间关系。通过MAC-CE激活的一个或多个空间关系可以理解为空间关系列表的一个子集。
可以理解的是，该空间关系列表中的每个空间关系可用于确定一个或多个波束。进一步可选地，网络设备可以根据终端设备当前已激活的面板，确定空间关系列表中的空间关系。由空间关系列表中的每个空间关系所确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。或者说，由空间关系列表中的任意一个空间关系所确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
因此，在本实施例中，网络设备在为终端设备确定和指示第一发射波束时，只要保证RRC消息配置的空间关系、MAC-CE激活的空间关系和DCI指示的空间关系中至少有一项所确定的波束在终端设备已激活的面板上，就可以保证终端设备用于发送PUSCH的第一发射波束在已激活的面板上。
需要说明的是，当RRC消息中配置的空间关系列表仅包括一个空间关系，终端设备可以直接根据RRC消息配置的空间关系来确定第一发射波束。而不需要网络设备再通过MAC-CE来激活空间关系列表中的部分空间关系以及通过DCI来指示被选择的空间关系。在这种情况下，上述第一指示信息可以仅携带在RRC消息中。
当RRC消息中配置的空间关系列表仅包括少量的几个空间关系，例如少于或等于MAC-CE激活的空间关系的个数，则终端设备可以直接根据RRC消息配置的空间关系确定激活的空间关系，进而根据DCI来确定被选择的一个空间关系。而不需要网络设备再通过MAC-CE来激活空间关系列表中的部分空间关系。在这种情况下，上述第一指示信息 可以携带在DCI和RRC消息中。
当MAC-CE仅激活了一个空间关系时，终端设备可以根据该MAC-CE激活的空间关系来确定第一发射波束。而不需要网络设备再通过DCI来指示被选择的空间关系。在这种情况下，上述第一指示信息可以携带在MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
应理解，上文所列举的特殊情况仅为一种可能的实现方式，而不应对本申请构成任何限定。在RRC消息中仅配置了一个或八个空间关系或者MAC-CE中仅激活了一个空间关系的情况下，网络设备仍然可以依次通过RRC消息、MAC-CE和DCI来指示第一发射波束。
作为一个可选的实施例，该上行信道为PUCCH，该第一指示信息携带在MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
具体地，该MAC-CE用于激活一个空间关系。通过该MAC-CE激活的空间关系用于确定发射波束。在本实施例中，通过MAC-CE激活的空间关系所确定的发射波束为第一发射波束，可用于发送PUCCH。且该第一发射波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
可选地，该方法还包括：终端设备接收RRC消息，该RRC消息用于配置空间关系列表，该空间关系列表中包括一个或多个空间关系。相对应地，网络设备发送RRC消息，该RRC消息用于配置空间关系列表，该空间关系列表中包括一个或多个空间关系。
上述通过MAC-CE激活的空间关系可以是网络设备预先通过RRC消息为终端设备配置的空间关系列表中的空间关系。进一步可选地，网络设备可以根据终端设备当前已激活的面板，确定空间关系列表中的空间关系。由空间关系列表中的每个空间关系所确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。或者说，由空间关系列表中的任意一个空间关系所确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
网络设备通过RRC消息为终端设备配置空间关系列表的具体方法与上文所述的网络设备通过RRC消息为终端设备配置TCI状态列表的具体方法相似。为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
需要说明的是，当该空间关系列表中仅包括一个空间关系时，该空间关系列表中所包括的空间关系即用于确定第一发射波束的空间关系。此情况下，网络设备可以直接通过RRC消息指示第一发射波束，而不需要通过MAC-CE来激活空间关系列表中的一个空间关系。也就是说，该第一指示信息可以仅携带在RRC消息中。
作为一个可选的实施例，该上行信号为非周期SRS，该第一指示信息携带在DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
具体地，该DCI可以是用于触发非周期SRS的传输的DCI，也可以是用作其他用途的DCI。本申请对此不作限定。该DCI中指示一个被选择的SRS资源集(SRS resource set)，该被选择的SRS资源集中包括一个或多个SRS资源(SRS resource)。由于每个SRS资源与一个空间关系对应，故每个SRS资源用于确定一个发射波束。因此，该DCI中指示的被选择的SRS资源集可用于确定一个或多个发射波束。在本实施例中，由该DCI指示的SRS资源集所确定的一个或多个发射波束为第一发射波束，可用于发送非周期SRS。且该第一发射波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的发射波束。
在一种可能的设计中，网络设备可以通过DCI触发非周期SRS的传输。当终端设备 接收到该DCI的时间与该DCI触发的非周期SRS的资源到达的时间的偏移量大于或等于预定门限时，终端设备可以基于上述第一指示信息确定第一发射波束。其中，上述用于触发非周期SRS的传输的DCI与携带第一指示信息的DCI可以是同一DCI，也可以是不同的DCI。本申请对此不作限定。
上述被选择的SRS资源集可以是网络设备预先通过MAC-CE激活的一个或多个SRS资源集中的一个。上述DCI中指示的SRS资源集的ID例如可以是该MAC-CE激活的一个或多个SRS资源集中的相对ID。由此可以减小DCI中的比特开销。
进一步可选地，网络设备可以根据终端设备当前已激活的面板，确定通过MAC-CE激活的SRS资源集。通过MAC-CE激活的SRS资源集中，每个SRS资源集对应的空间关系所确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。或者说，由MAC-CE激活的SRS资源集中的任意一个SRS资源集对应的空间关系所确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
上述通过MAC-CE激活的SRS资源集可以是网络设备预先通过RRC消息配置的一个或多个SRS资源集的子集。可以理解的是，该RRC消息配置的一个或多个SRS资源集中的每个SRS资源集可用于确定一个或多个发射波束。
进一步可选地，网络设备可以根据终端设备当前已激活的面板，确定通过RRC消息配置的SRS资源集。由该RRC消息配置的SRS资源集中，每个SRS资源集对应的空间关系所确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。或者说，由RRC消息配置的任意一个SRS资源集对应的空间关系所确定的发射波束可以是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
因此，在本实施例中，网络设备在为终端设备确定和指示第一发射波束时，只要保证RRC消息配置的空间关系和MAC-CE激活的空间关系中至少有一项所确定的波束在终端设备已激活的面板上，就可以保证终端设备用于发送PUCCH的第一发射波束在已激活的面板上。
需要说明的是，当RRC消息中配置的SRS资源集仅包括一个SRS资源集时，终端设备可以直接根据RRC消息配置的SRS资源集确定第一发射波束，而不需要通过MAC-CE和DCI来指示被选择的SRS资源集。此情况下，上述第一指示信息可以仅携带在RRC消息中。
当MAC-CE中激活的SRS资源集仅包括一个SRS资源集时，终端设备可以直接根据MAC-CE中激活的SRS确定第一发射波束，而不需要通过DCI来指示被选择的SRS资源集。此情况下，上述第一指示信息可以携带在MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
作为一个可选的实施例，该上行信号为半持续(semi persistent，SP)SRS，该第一指示信息携带在MAC-CE中，或，该第一指示信息携带在MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
具体地，该MAC-CE用于激活一个SRS资源集，该激活的SRS资源集中包括一个或多个SRS资源。由于每个SRS资源与一个空间关系对应，故每个SRS资源用于确定一个发射波束。因此，该MAC-CE中激活的SRS资源集可用于确定一个或多个发射波束，以用于发送半持续SRS。
其中，该MAC-CE中SRS资源对应的空间关系例如可以是由该MAC-CE配置，也可以由网络设备通过RRC消息配置。
当该MAC-CE中配置有SRS资源与空间关系的对应关系时，终端设备可以优先按照MAC-CE中配置的SRS资源与空间关系的对应关系确定所激活的SRS资源集对应的空间关系，进而确定第一发射波束。此情况下，上述第一指示信息仅携带在MAC-CE中。
当该MAC-CE中未配置SRS资源与空间关系的对应关系时，终端设备可以按照RRC消息中配置的SRS资源与空间关系的对应关系确定所激活的SRS资源集对应的空间关系，进而确定第一发射波束。此情况下，上述第一指示信息携带在MAC-CE和RRC消息中。
当第一指示信息携带在MAC-CE和RRC消息中时，网络设备在为终端设备确定和指示第一发射波束时，只要保证RRC消息配置的SRS资源对应的空间关系和MAC-CE激活的SRS资源对应的空间关系中至少有一项所确定的波束在终端设备已激活的面板上，就可以保证终端设备用于发送半持续SRS的第一发射波束在已激活的面板上。
作为一个实施例，该上行信号为周期SRS，该第一指示信息携带在RRC消息中。
具体地，该RRC消息中配置一个或多个SRS资源集，每个SRS资源集包括一个或多个SRS资源。由于每个SRS资源与一个空间关系对应，故每个SRS资源用于确定一个发射波束。因此，该RRC消息配置的一个或多个SRS资源集可用于确定一个或多个发射波束。在本实施例中，由RRC消息配置的SRS资源集所确定的一个或多个发射波束为第一发射波束，可用于发送周期SRS。且该第一发射波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束。
以上，结合上行信号或上行信道的传输详细说明了网络设备通过第一指示信息指示第一发射波束以及终端设备根据第一指示信息确定第一发射波束的具体方法。但应理解，上文所列举的实施例仅为示例，本申请对于上行信号和上行信道的类型并不限定，本申请对于上行信号或上行信道的调度或触发传输的具体方法也不做限定。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备可以自行确定第一发射波束。可选地，步骤310具体包括：终端设备根据当前已激活的面板确定默认波束，并将该默认波束作为用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第一发射波束。
可选地，该默认波束参考当前已激活的一个或多个面板上满足预设条件的波束。
可选地，默认波束参考第一时隙内使用的第一PDCCH的接收波束，第一PDCCH的接收波束是当前已激活的面板上的接收波束中与一个或多个控制资源集中标识ID最小的控制资源集对应的接收波束，且该一个或多个控制资源集是该终端设备在第一时隙内监测的控制资源集；该第一时隙为一个或多个时隙中距离参考时隙最近的一个时隙，该一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙中配置有一个或多个控制资源集，且该一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙内配置的该一个或多个资源集中至少有一个控制资源集的接收波束在当前已激活的面板上。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N，且M为整数)次同步信号块的接收所使用的L(1≤L≤N，且L为整数)个波束。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N，且M为整数)次同步信号块的接收所使用的L(1≤L≤N，且L为整数)个波束。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上用于接收下行信 号或下行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N，且M为整数)次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L(1≤L≤N，且L为整数)个波束。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上第一同步信号块的接收波束，该第一同步信号块由初始接入流程确定。
可选地，默认波束参考当前已激活的N(N≥1且为整数)个面板上用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束中，距离参考时隙最近的M(1≤M≤N，且M为整数)次上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的L(1≤L≤N，且L为整数)个波束。
其中，参考时隙可以是指被网络设备调度或触发的信号或信道的传输资源所在的时隙。该参考时隙例如也可以是物理上行控制信道所在的时隙、或物理上行共享信道所在的时隙、或上行参考信号(如探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)的传输资源所在的时隙等。由于上文方法200中已经结合附图详细说明了终端设备确定参考波束的具体方法和参考波束的可能满足的预设条件，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
在步骤330中，终端设备通过该第一发射波束发送上行信号或上行信道。相应地，网络设备通过与该第一发射波束对应的接收波束接收该上行信号或上行信道。
如前所述，终端设备可以根据网络设备发送的第一指示信息确定第一发射波束，也可以自行确定第一发射波束。由于波束配对关系，网络设备也需使用与第一发射波束对应的接收波束来接收上行信号或上行信道。因此，无论是否由网络设备发送第一指示信息来指示第一发射波束，网络设备都需要知道终端设备当前已激活的面板，以便确定与第一发射波束对应的接收波束。
可选地，该方法还包括步骤340，终端设备发送第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示当前已激活的面板。相应地，网络设备接收该第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示终端设备当前已激活的面板。
具体地，终端设备可以将当前已激活的面板的ID上报网络设备，或者，也可以将当前已激活的面板相关联的信息上报给网络设备。例如，与面板相关联的信息可以是参考信号资源标识，如SRS资源的ID或SRS资源集的ID；或者，与面板相关联的信息可以是空间关系，如空间关系的ID。为了简洁，这里不一一列举。本申请对于第二指示信息中所携带的具体信息不作限定。
另外，由于终端设备通过第一发射波束发送上行信号或上行信道的具体过程可以与现有技术相同，为了简洁，这里省略对该具体过程的详细说明。
基于上述技术方案，终端设备可以使用当前已激活的面板上的波束来发送上行信号或上行信道，可以避免面板激活带来的较大时延。终端设备即便要进行面板切换或波束切换，其带来的时延也远远减小。因此，有利于终端设备在调度的资源到来之前完成面板切换或波束切换，使用所选择的波束来发送上行信号或上行信道。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活，因此也可以达到节电效果。
以上，结合图2至图8详细说明了本申请实施例提供的信号传输方法。事实上，上文所提供的信号传输方法也并不限于终端设备确定波束，上文所提供的信号传输方法也可用于网络设备确定波束。例如，网络设备可以根据当前已激活的面板确定用于发送下行信号或下行信道的发射波束；或，网络设备可以根据当前已激活的面板确定用于接收上行信号或上行信道的接收波束。
除了上文所提供的信号传输方法之外，本申请还提供了一种信号传输方法，能够避免面板激活的较大时延，有利于提高系统传输性能。下面结合图9详细说明本申请又一实施例提供的信号传输方法。
图9是从设备交互的角度示出的本申请实施例提供的信号传输方法400的示意性流程图。具体地，图9示出了上行信号或上行信道的传输方法。如图所示，图9中示出的方法400可以包括步骤410至步骤440。下面结合附图对方法400做详细说明。
在步骤410中，终端设备确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第二波束。该第二波束与用于接收调度信道的第三波束为同一面板上的波束，该调度信道用于调度上行信号或上行信道，或该调度信道用于触发上行信号或上行信道的发送。
为便于与上文所述的第一波束区分。本实施例中将终端设备确定的用于发送上行信号或上行信道的发射波束记作第二波束，将终端设备接收调度信道的接收波束记作第三波束。
其中，调度信道可以用于调度上行资源以传输上行信号或上行信道。例如，网络设备可以通过调度信道调度PUSCH，该调度信道例如可以是PDCCH。调度信道也可以用于触发上行信号或上行信道的传输。例如，网络设备可以通过调度信道触发非周期SRS的传输，该调度信道例如也可以是PDCCH。
应理解，调度信道仅为便于理解而定义，不应对本申请构成任何限定。在具体的上行信号或上行信道的传输中，调度信道可以是不同的信道。本申请对于用作调度信道的具体信道不作限定。
在本申请实施例中，第二波束与第三波束为同一面板上的波束。由于调度信道在上行信号或上行信道的传输资源之前到达，终端设备接收该调度信道的时间早于发送上行信号或上行信道的时间。而终端设备用于接收调度信道的第三波束必然是在接收调度信道时就已激活的面板上的波束，故与第三波束为同一面板上的第二波束必然也是在已激活的面板上的波束。因此，为了避免面板激活带来的时延，终端设备在接收调度信道之后可以保持该面板的激活状态，在发送上行信号或上行信道的传输资源到达时，可以直接通过该激活的面板上的第二波束来发送上行信号或上行信道。换句话说，终端设备所确定的用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束。
在本申请实施例中，第二波束可以由网络设备通过信令指示，也可以由终端设备自行确定。下面分别结合这两种不同的方式来详细说明终端设备确定第二波束的具体过程。
在一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备根据网络设备发送的第三指示信息来确定第二波束。可选地，该方法还包括步骤420：终端设备接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示第二波束。相应地，在步骤420中，网络设备向终端设备发送第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示第二波束。
可选地，该第一指示信息携带在DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息的一项或多项中。
网络设备通过第三指示信息向终端设备指示第二波束的具体方法可以如上文方法300中网络设备通过第一指示信息向终端设备指示第一发射波束的具体方法相同，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
当网络设备通过DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中的两项或三项的结合来指示第一发射波束时，只要保证DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息中的两项或三项的结合中的至少一项所确定的波束在终端设备已激活的面板上，便可以保证该第一指示信息所指示的第一发射波束在终端设备已激活的面板上。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，终端设备根据第三波束所在的面板确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第二波束。
也就是说，终端设备可以从第三波束所在的面板上选择用于发送上行信号或上行信道的发射波束作为第二波束。
在步骤430中，终端设备通过第二波束发送上行信号或上行信道。相应地，网络设备通过与该第二波束对应的接收波束接收该上行信号或上行信道。
其中，该上行信号或上行信道可以是网络设备此前通过调度信道调度的传输资源上传输的上行信号或上行信道。
如前所述，终端设备可以根据网络设备发送的第三指示信息确定第二波束，也可以自行确定第二波束。由于波束配对关系，网络设备也需使用与第二波束对应的接收波束来接收上行信号或上行信道。因此，无论是否由网络设备发送第三指示信息来指示第二波束，网络设备都需要知道终端设备当前已激活的面板，以便确定与第二波束对应的接收波束。
可选地，该方法还包括步骤440，终端设备发送第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示当前已激活的面板。相应地，网络设备接收该第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示终端设备当前已激活的面板。
步骤440与上文方法300的步骤340中终端设备发送第二指示信息的具体过程相同，为了简洁，这里不再赘述。
另外，终端设备通过第二波束发送上行信号或上行信道的具体过程可以与现有技术相同，为了简洁，这里省略对该具体过程的详细说明。
基于上述技术方案，终端设备可以根据接收调度信道使用的第三波束所在的面板来确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第二波束。由于终端设备在接收调度信道时使用了第三波束，故该第三波束所在的面板是已激活的面板，在该面板上确定第二波束，也就是在当前已激活的面板上确定第二波束。由此可以避免面板激活带来的较大时延。终端设备即便要进行面板切换或波束切换，其带来的时延也远远减小。因此，有利于终端设备在调度的资源到来之前完成面板切换或波束切换，使用所选择的波束来发送上行信号或上行信道。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活。如此一来，终端设备的所有面板不需要长时间处于激活状态。如此一来，终端设备的所有面板不需要长时间处于激活状态，因此也可以达到节电效果。
为了避免终端设备激活面板或切换面板的时延较大而错过网络设备调度的资源，本申请还提供了一种面板切换的方法。
图10是从设备交互的角度示出的本申请又一实施例提供的面板指示方法的500的示意性流程图。如图所示，该方法500可以包括步骤510至步骤530。下面结合附图对该方 法500做详细说明。
在步骤510中，网络设备在第一时间节点向终端设备发送面板激活命令，该面板激活命令用于激活一个或多个面板。相应地，终端设备在该第一时间节点接收来自网络设备的面板激活命令，该面板激活命令用于激活一个或多个面板。
具体地，该面板激活命令可以是复用已有的信令，也可以是新增的信令。本申请对此不作限定。网络设备可以通过面板激活命令来指示面板，如面板的ID或其他可用于唯一指示一个面板的信息，如与面板具有对应关系的波束等。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该面板激活命令为波束指示信息。
在这种实现方式中，面板与波束具有对应关系。该波束指示信息所指示的波束可用于确定需要激活的面板。网络设备可以预先获取该终端设备的面板与波束的对应关系。例如可以由终端设备上报网络设备，或者预先定义，本申请对此不作限定。
网络设备可以根据面板与波束的对应关系，通过波束指示信息指示波束的同时隐式指示了所需激活的面板。该波束指示信息例如可以是上文方法200或方法300中所列举的第一指示信息；或者，也可以是上文方法400中所列举的第三指示信息；或者，还可以是新增的用于指示波束的信息。本申请对此不作限定。
终端设备是能够知道自身所配置的面板与各波束的对应关系的，因此在接收到网络设备发送的波束指示信息后，便可以根据面板与波束的对应关系，确定需要激活的面板。
其中，面板与波束的对应关系，可以是一个面板对应一个波束，也可以是一个面板对应多个波束，本申请对此不作限定。由于网络设备通过面板激活命令激活的面板可以是一个或多个，故该波束指示信息中所指示的波束也可以是一个或多个。本申请对此不作限定。
在另一种可能的实现方式中，该面板激活命令包括需要激活的一个或多个面板的指示。
在上文实施例中已经列举了面板的指示的多种可能，例如，面板的指示可以是SRS资源的ID、SRS资源集的ID、NZP-CSI-RS资源的ID、NZP-CSI-RS资源集的ID、空间关系的ID以及TCI状态的ID等。但应理解，这不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于面板的指示的具体形式不作限定。当协议定义通过某一信息来指示面板时，网络设备便可以基于该信息与面板的对应关系来指示需要激活的一个或多个面板。
可选地，该面板激活命令配置在DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息的一项或多项中。
如前所述，面板激活命令可以是波束指示信息。如上文实施例所述，波束指示信息可以携带在DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息的一项或多项中，故该面板激活命令也可以携带在DCI、MAC-CE和RRC消息的一项或多项中。
面板激活命令也可以是独立的信令。该独立的信令例如可以复用已有的DCI、MAC-CE或RRC消息，或者，也可以是新增的信令。本申请对此不作限定。
在步骤520中，终端设备在第二时间节点收发信号。相应地，网络设备在第二时间节点收发信号。
具体地，终端设备可以在第二时间节点接收下行信号或下行信道。相应地，网络设备可以在第二时间节点发送下行信号或下行信道。终端设备也可以在第二时间节点发送上行信号或上行信道。相应地，终端设备也可以在第二时间节点接收上行信号或上行信道。
终端设备在该第二时间节点收发的信号或信道可以是网络设备通过调度信道调度或 触发传输的信号或信道，该调度信道例如可以是上文中方法400中所述的调度信道；终端设备在该第二时间节点收发的信号或信道也可以是终端设备通过免动态授权传输的方式发送的信号或信道等等。本申请对于第二时间节点收发的信号或信道不作限定。
其中，第二时间节点与第一时间节点间的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长和正确接收该面板激活命令的时长之和。
为便于理解，图11示出了第一时间节点和第二时间节点的一例。如图所示，终端设备在第一时间节点正确接收到面板激活命令，第二时间节点是用于传输信号或信道的资源到达的起始位置。为了在信号或信道的传输资源到达之前完成面板切换，可以限制第一时间节点和第二时间节点间的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长和正确接收该面板激活命令的时长之和。从而可以保证终端设备在信号或信道的传输资源到达时能够使用激活的面板上的波束收发信号。
但应理解，通过面板激活命令激活终端设备的一个或多个面板，并将第二时间节点和第一时间节点的时间间隔限制为大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长和正确接收该面板激活命令的时长之和，只是保证终端设备能够在信号或信道的传输资源到达时使用该面板激活命令激活的面板上的波束收发信号，但并不代表终端设备一定会使用该面板激活命令激活的面板上的波束收发信号。该面板激活命令也有可能是为下一次或下下一次信号或信道的传输而激活的面板。
可选地，该方法还包括步骤530：网络设备向终端设备发送面板切换命令，该面板切换命令用于指示切换至面板激活命令所激活的面板。相应地，终端设备接收来自网络设备的面板切换命令，该面板切换命令用于指示切换至面板激活命令所激活的面板。
终端设备可以在接收到步骤510中所述的面板激活命令之后，激活该面板激活命令所指示的一个或多个面板，并可以在接收到步骤530中的面板切换命令后，将面板切换为面板激活命令所激活的一个或多个面板。
在本申请实施例中，可选地，该面板激活命令和面板切换命令可以是同一个信令中的同一个字段，即，通过同一个字段完成激活和切换的指示。此情况下，网络设备所指示的需要激活的面板和需要切换的面板可以是相同的。终端设备可以将面板切换为激活的全部面板。
可选地，该面板激活命令和面板切换命令可以是同一个信令中的不同字段，即，通过不同的字段完成激活和切换的指示。此情况下，网络设备所指示的需要激活的面板和需要切换的面板可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。终端设备可以将面板切换为激活的全部或部分面板。
可选地，该面板激活命令和面板切换命令可以是不同的信令。此情况下，网络设备所指示的需要激活的面板和需要切换的面板可以是相同的，也可以是不同的。终端设备可以将面板切换为激活的全部或部分面板。当面板激活命令和面板切换命令是不同的信令时，该面板切换命令可以是在面板激活命令之后发送的信令。在一种实现方式中，该面板切换命令为波束指示信息。
在这种实现方式中，面板与波束具有对应关系。该波束指示信息所指示的波束可用于确定需要切换的面板。网络设备可以预先获取该终端设备的面板与波束的对应关系。例如可以由终端设备上报网络设备，或者预先定义，本申请对此不作限定。
网络设备可以根据面板与波束的对应关系，通过波束指示信息指示波束的同时隐式指示了所需切换的面板。该波束指示信息例如可以是上文方法200或方法300中所列举的第一指示信息；或者，也可以是上文方法400中所列举的第三指示信息；或者，还可以是新增的用于指示波束的信息。本申请对此不作限定。
终端设备是能够知道自身所配置的面板与各波束的对应关系的，因此在接收到网络设备发送的波束指示信息后，便可以根据面板与波束的对应关系，确定需要切换的面板。
其中，面板与波束的对应关系，可以是一个面板对应一个波束，也可以是一个面板对应多个波束，本申请对此不作限定。由于网络设备通过面板切换命令切换的面板可以是一个或多个，故该波束指示信息中所指示的波束也可以是一个或多个。本申请对此不作限定。
在另一种实现方式中，该面板切换命令包括需要切换的面板的指示。
在上文步骤510中已经列举了面板的指示的多种可能，为了简洁，这里不再一一列举。应理解，本申请对于面板的指示的具体形式不作限定。当协议定义通过某一信息来指示面板时，网络设备便可以基于该信息与面板的对应关系来指示需要切换的一个或多个面板。
可选地，上述第一时间节点与第二时间节点的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长、该终端设备正确接收该面板激活命令和终端设备正确接收该面板切换命令的时长之和。
即，当网络设备通过不同的信令来指示需要激活的面板和需要切换的面板时，该第一时间节点与第二时间节点的时间间隔可以进一步限制为大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长、该终端设备正确接收该面板激活命令和终端设备正确接收该面板切换命令的时长之和。
需要说明的是，当终端设备能够在激活面板的同时接收信令，则第一时间节点和第二时间节点间的时间间隔可以简化为大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长、该终端设备正确接收该面板激活命令时长之和。
此外，当面板激活命令和面板切换命令携带在同一信令中时，该终端设备正确接收该面板激活命令和终端设备正确接收该面板切换命令的时间可以是重合的，故第一时间节点和第二时间节点间的时间间隔也可以简化为大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长、该终端设备正确接收该面板激活命令时长之和。
应理解，图10仅为便于理解而示意，不应对本申请构成任何限定。当面板激活命令与面板切换命令为同一信令时，图中的面板切换命令可以和面板激活命令可以重合。此外，图中示出的调度信道仅为示例，在实际传输过程中，该调度信道也可能并不存在。并且，本申请对于面板激活命令、面板切换命令以及调度信道的发送的先后顺序不作限定。
可选地，步骤520具体包括：终端设备在第二时间节点通过激活的面板上的波束收发信号。相应地，网络设备在第二时间节点通过与终端设备激活的面板上的波束所对应的波束收发信号。
具体地，终端设备可以预先确定用于收发信号的波束。在本实施例中，该波束是在第一时间节点中通过面板激活命令激活的面板上的波束。终端设备确定波束的方法例如可以为上文方法200、方法300或方法400中所述的方法。网络设备可以根据预先确定的波束配对关系，通过与终端设备的波束所对应的波束收发信号。
图11示出了终端设备在第二时间节点通过激活的面板上的波束收发信号的一例。如 图所示，终端设备在第一时间节点接收到面板激活命令后，激活并切换至面板1。在第二时间节点，终端设备通过面板1上的波束收发信号。
由于本实施例中限制了第二时间节点与第一时间节点的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长和正确接收该面板激活命令的时长之和，或，第二时间节点与第一时间节点的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长、正确接收该面板激活命令的时长和正确接收该面板切换命令的时长之和。因此，在信号或信道的传输资源到达之前，为了终端设备预留了充裕的时间进行面板切换，使得终端设备能够在信号或信道的传输资源到达前完成了面板切换，在该信号或信道的传输资源到达时使用激活的面板上的波束收发信号。
基于上述技术方案，终端设备可以根据网络设备的面板激活命令激活面板，通过限制第二时间节点与第一时间节点的时间间隔大于或等于面板激活的时长、面板切换的时长和正确接收该面板激活命令的时长之和，在信号或信道的传输资源到达之前，为了终端设备预留了充裕的时间进行面板切换，可以保证终端设备在信号或信道的传输资源到达前完成面板切换，从而能够在信号或信道的传输资源到达时使用激活的面板上的波束收发信号。从而有利于提高系统的传输性能。此外，终端设备也不需要为了避免面板激活带来的时延，将所有的面板全部激活。如此一来，终端设备的所有面板不需要长时间处于激活状态，因此也可以达到节电效果。
以上，结合图2至图11详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法。以下，结合图12至图14详细说明本申请实施例提供的装置。
图12是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图12所示，该通信装置1000可以包括收发单元1100和处理单元1200。
在一种可能的设计中，该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备，例如，可以为终端设备，或者配置于终端设备中的芯片。
具体地，该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200、方法300、方法400或方法500中的终端设备，该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200、图8中的方法300、图9中的方法400或图10中的方法500中终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且，该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200、图8中的方法300、图9中的方法400或图10中的方法500的相应流程。
其中，当该通信装置1000用于执行图2中的方法200时，收发单元1100可用于执行方法200中的步骤220至步骤240，处理单元1200可用于执行方法200中的步骤210。应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
当该通信装置1000用于执行图8中的方法300时，收发单元1100可用于执行方法300中的步骤320至步骤240，处理单元1200可用于执行方法300中的步骤310。应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
当该通信装置1000用于执行图9中的方法400时，收发单元1100可用于执行方法400中的步骤420至步骤440，处理单元1200可用于执行方法400中的步骤410。应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此 不再赘述。
当该通信装置1000用于执行图10中的方法500时，收发单元1100可用于执行方法500中的步骤520至步骤530，该处理单元1200例如可以在步骤510之后激活面板，并可以在步骤530之后切换面板。应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
还应理解，该通信装置1000为终端设备时，该通信装置1000中的收发单元1100可对应于图13中示出的终端设备2000中的收发器2020，该通信装置1000中的处理单元1200可对应于图13中示出的终端设备2000中的处理器2010。
还应理解，该通信装置1000为配置于终端设备中的芯片时，该通信装置1000中的收发单元1100可以为输入/输出接口。
在另一种可能的设计中，该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备，例如，可以为网络设备，或者配置于网络设备中的芯片。
具体地，该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200、方法300、方法400或方法500中的网络设备，该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200、图8中的方法300、图9中的方法400或图10中的方法500中网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且，该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200、图8中的方法300、图9中的方法400或图10中的方法500的相应流程。
其中，当该通信装置1000用于执行图2中的方法200时，收发单元1100可用于执行方法200中的步骤220至步骤240，处理单元1200可用于执行方法200中的步骤210。应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
当该通信装置1000用于执行图8中的方法300时，收发单元1100可用于执行方法300中的步骤320至步骤240，处理单元1200可用于执行方法300中的步骤310。应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
当该通信装置1000用于执行图9中的方法400时，收发单元1100可用于执行方法400中的步骤420至步骤440，处理单元1200可用于执行方法400中的步骤410。应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
当该通信装置1000用于执行图10中的方法500时，收发单元1100可用于执行方法500中的步骤510至步骤530，处理单元1200可用于在步骤510之前确定需要激活的终端设备的一个或多个面板。应理解，各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
还应理解，该通信装置1000为网络设备时，该通信装置1000中的收发单元为可对应于图14中示出的网络设备3000中的收发器3200，该通信装置1000中的处理单元1200可对应于图14中示出的网络设备3000中的处理器3100。
还应理解，该通信装置1000为配置于网络设备中的芯片时，该通信装置1000中的收发单元1100可以为输入/输出接口。
图13是本申请实施例提供的终端设备2000的结构示意图。该终端设备2000可应用 于如图1所示的系统中，执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。如图所示，该终端设备2000包括处理器2010和收发器2020。可选地，该终端设备2000还包括存储器2030。其中，处理器2010、收发器2002和存储器2030之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信，传递控制和/或数据信号，该存储器2030用于存储计算机程序，该处理器2010用于从该存储器2030中调用并运行该计算机程序，以控制该收发器2020收发信号。可选地，终端设备2000还可以包括天线2040，用于将收发器2020输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。
上述处理器2010可以和存储器2030可以合成一个处理装置，处理器2010用于执行存储器2030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时，该存储器2030也可以集成在处理器2010中，或者独立于处理器2010。该处理器2010可以与图12中的处理单元对应。
上述收发器2020可以与图12中的收发单元对应，也可以称为收发单元。收发器2020可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中，接收器用于接收信号，发射器用于发射信号。
应理解，图13所示的终端设备2000能够实现图2、图8至图10所示方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。终端设备2000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能，分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述，为避免重复，此处适当省略详细描述。
上述处理器2010可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作，而收发器2020可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述，此处不再赘述。
可选地，上述终端设备2000还可以包括电源2050，用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。
除此之外，为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善，该终端设备2000还可以包括输入单元2060、显示单元2070、音频电路2080、摄像头2090和传感器2100等中的一个或多个，所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器2082、麦克风2084等。
图14是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图，例如可以为基站的结构示意图。该基站3000可应用于如图1所示的系统中，执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。如图所示，该基站3000可以包括一个或多个射频单元，如远端射频单元(remote radio unit，RRU)3100和一个或多个基带单元(BBU)(也可称为分布式单元(DU))3200。所述RRU 3100可以称为收发单元，与图12中的收发单元1200对应。可选地，该收发单元3100还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等，其可以包括至少一个天线3101和射频单元3102。可选地，收发单元3100可以包括接收单元和发送单元，接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)，发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述RRU 3100部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 3200部分主要用于进行基带处理，对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 3100与BBU 3200可以是物理上设置在一起，也可以物理上分离设置的，即分布式基站。
所述BBU 3200为基站的控制中心，也可以称为处理单元，可以与图12中的处理单 元1100对应，主要用于完成基带处理功能，如信道编码，复用，调制，扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理单元)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程，例如，生成上述指示信息等。
在一个示例中，所述BBU 3200可以由一个或多个单板构成，多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网)，也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网，5G网或其他网)。所述BBU 3200还包括存储器3201和处理器3202。所述存储器3201用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器3202用于控制基站进行必要的动作，例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器3201和处理器3202可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说，可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。
应理解，图14所示的基站3000能够实现图2、图8至图10所示方法实施例中涉及网络设备的各个过程。基站3000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能，分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述，为避免重复，此处适当省略详细描述。
上述BBU 3200可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作，而RRU 3100可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述，此处不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置，包括处理器和接口；所述处理器用于执行上述任一方法实施例中的方法。
应理解，上述处理装置可以是一个芯片。例如，该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)，可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)，还可以是系统芯片(system on chip，SoC)，还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit，CPU)，还可以是网络处理器(network processor，NP)，还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor，DSP)，还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit，MCU)，还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device，PLD)或其他集成芯片。
在实现过程中，上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成，或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复，这里不再详细描述。
应注意，本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译 码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括：计算机程序代码，当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行图2、图8至图10所示实施例中的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质，该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码，当该程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得该计算机执行图2、图8至图10所示实施例中的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法，本申请还提供一种系统，其包括前述的一个或多个终端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line，DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc，DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如，固态硬盘(solid state disc，SSD))等。
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备完全对应，由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤，例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施 例中接收或发送的步骤，除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中，处理器可以为一个或多个。
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如，部件可以是但不限于，在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示，在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中，部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外，这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据，例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step)，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
在上述实施例中，各功能单元的功能可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令(程序)。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令(程序)时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的 服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD))等。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (56)

  1. 一种信号传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    终端设备确定用于接收下行信号或下行信道的第一波束，所述第一波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    所述终端设备通过所述第一波束接收所述下行信号或所述下行信道。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一波束。
  3. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备确定用于接收下行信号或下行信道的第一波束，包括：
    所述终端设备根据当前已激活的面板确定默认波束，所述默认波束为用于接收所述下行信号或所述下行信道的所述第一波束。
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考当前已激活的一个或多个面板上满足预设条件的波束。
  5. 如权利要求3或4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考：
    第一时隙内使用的第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束，第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束是当前已激活的面板上的接收波束中与一个或多个控制资源集中标识ID最小的控制资源集对应的接收波束，且所述一个或多个控制资源集是所述终端设备在第一时隙内监测的控制资源集；所述第一时隙为一个或多个时隙中距离参考时隙最近的一个时隙，所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙中配置有一个或多个控制资源集，且所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙内配置的一个或多个资源集中至少有一个控制资源集的接收波束在当前已激活的面板上；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次同步信号块的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    在激活的上行带宽部分BWP中，当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次同步信号块的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上第一同步信号块的接收波束，所述第一同步信号块由初始接 入流程确定；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的L个波束；
    其中，N≥1，1≤M≤N，1≤L≤N，L、M和N均为整数。
  6. 一种信号传输方法，其特征在于，包括：
    终端设备确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第一波束，所述第一波束是当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    所述终端设备通过所述第一波束发送所述上行信号或所述上行信道。
  7. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一波束。
  8. 如权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第一波束，包括：
    所述终端设备根据当前已激活的面板确定默认波束，所述默认波束为用于发送所述上行信号或所述上行信道的所述第一波束。
  9. 如权利要求7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考当前已激活的一个或多个面板上满足预设条件的波束。
  10. 如权利要求8或9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考：
    第一时隙内使用的第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束，第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束是当前已激活的面板上的接收波束中与一个或多个控制资源集中标识ID最小的控制资源集对应的接收波束，且所述一个或多个控制资源集是所述终端设备在第一时隙内监测的控制资源集；所述第一时隙为一个或多个时隙中距离参考时隙最近的一个时隙，所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙中配置有一个或多个控制资源集，且所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙内配置的一个或多个资源集中至少有一个控制资源集的接收波束在当前已激活的面板上；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次同步信号块的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    在激活的上行带宽部分BWP中，当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次同步信号块的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上第一同步信号块的接收波束，所述第一同步信号块由初始接入流程确定；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的L个波束；
    其中，N≥1，1≤M≤N，1≤L≤N，L、M和N均为整数。
  11. 一种波束指示方法，其特征在于，包括：
    网络设备生成第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一波束，所述第一波束为终端设备用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束，且所述第一波束是所述终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。
  12. 一种波束指示方法，其特征在于，包括：
    网络设备生成第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一波束，所述第一波束为终端设备用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束，且所述第一波束是所述终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    所述网络设备向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。
  13. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于确定用于接收下行信号或下行信道的第一波束，所述第一波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    收发单元，用于通过所述第一波束接收所述下行信号或所述下行信道。
  14. 如权利要求13所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一波束。
  15. 如权利要求13所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元具体用于，根据所述终端设备当前已激活的面板确定默认波束，所述默认波束为用于接收所述下行信号或所述下行信道的所述第一波束。
  16. 如权利要求15所述的装置，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考所述终端设备当前已激活的一个或多个面板上满足预设条件的波束。
  17. 如权利要求15或16所述的装置，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考：
    第一时隙内使用的第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束，第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束是当前已激活的面板上的接收波束中与一个或多个控制资源集中标识ID最小的控制资源集对应的接收波束，且所述一个或多个控制资源集是所述终端设备在第一时隙内监测的控制资源集；所述第一时隙为一个或多个时隙中距离参考时隙最近的一个时隙，所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙中配置有一个或多个控制资源集，且所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙内配置的一个或多个资源集中至少有一个控制资源集的接收波束在当前已激活的面板上；或
    在激活的上行带宽部分BWP中，当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙 最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次同步信号块的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上第一同步信号块的接收波束，所述第一同步信号块由初始接入流程确定；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次的上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的L个波束；
    其中，N≥1，1≤M≤N，1≤L≤N，L、M和N均为整数。
  18. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第一波束，所述第一波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    收发单元，用于通过所述第一波束发送所述上行信号或所述上行信道。
  19. 如权利要求18所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发单元还用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一波束。
  20. 如权利要求18所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元具体用于，根据所述终端设备当前已激活的面板确定默认波束，所述默认波束为用于发送所述上行信号或所述上行信道的所述第一波束。
  21. 如权利要求20所述的装置，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考所述终端设备当前已激活的一个或多个面板上满足预设条件的波束。
  22. 如权利要求20或21所述的装置，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考：
    第一时隙内使用的第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束，第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束是当前已激活的面板上的接收波束中与一个或多个控制资源集中标识ID最小的控制资源集对应的接收波束，且所述一个或多个控制资源集是所述终端设备在第一时隙内监测的控制资源集；所述第一时隙为一个或多个时隙中距离参考时隙最近的一个时隙，所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙中配置有一个或多个控制资源集，且所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙内配置的一个或多个资源集中至少有一个控制资源集的接收波束在当前已激活的面板上；或
    在激活的上行带宽部分BWP中，当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次同步信号块的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上第一同步信号块的接收波束，所述第一同步信号块由初始接入流程确定；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次的上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的L个波束；
    其中，N≥1，1≤M≤N，1≤L≤N，L、M和N均为整数。
  23. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于生成第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一波束，所述第一波束为终端设备用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束，且所述第一波束是所述终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    收发单元，用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。
  24. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于生成第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一波束，所述第一波束为终端设备用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束，且所述第一波束是所述终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    收发单元，用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。
  25. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器，用于确定用于接收下行信号或下行信道的第一波束，所述第一波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    收发器，用于通过所述第一波束接收所述下行信号或所述下行信道。
  26. 如权利要求25所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发器还用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一波束。
  27. 如权利要求25所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理器具体用于，根据所述终端设备当前已激活的面板确定默认波束，所述默认波束为用于接收所述下行信号或所述下行信道的所述第一波束。
  28. 如权利要求27所述的装置，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考所述终端设备当前已激活的一个或多个面板上满足预设条件的波束。
  29. 如权利要求27或28所述的装置，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考：
    第一时隙内使用的第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束，第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束是当前已激活的面板上的接收波束中与一个或多个控制资源集中标识ID最小的控制资源集对应的接收波束，且所述一个或多个控制资源集是所述终端设备在第一时隙内监测的控制资源集；所述第一时隙为一个或多个时隙中距离参考时隙最近的一个时隙，所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙中配置有一个或多个控制资源集，且所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙内配置的一个或多个资源集中至少有一个控制资源集的接收波束在当前已激活的面板上；或
    在激活的上行带宽部分BWP中，当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID 最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次同步信号块的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上第一同步信号块的接收波束，所述第一同步信号块由初始接入流程确定；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次的上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的L个波束；
    其中，N≥1，1≤M≤N，1≤L≤N，L、M和N均为整数。
  30. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器，用于确定用于发送上行信号或上行信道的第一波束，所述第一波束是终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    收发器，用于通过所述第一波束发送所述上行信号或所述上行信道。
  31. 如权利要求30所述的装置，其特征在于，所述收发器还用于接收来自网络设备的第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一波束。
  32. 如权利要求30所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理器具体用于，根据所述终端设备当前已激活的面板确定默认波束，所述默认波束为用于发送所述上行信号或所述上行信道的所述第一波束。
  33. 如权利要求32所述的装置，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考所述终端设备当前已激活的一个或多个面板上满足预设条件的波束。
  34. 如权利要求32或33所述的装置，其特征在于，所述默认波束参考：
    第一时隙内使用的第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束，第一物理下行控制信道的接收波束是当前已激活的面板上的接收波束中与一个或多个控制资源集中标识ID最小的控制资源集对应的接收波束，且所述一个或多个控制资源集是所述终端设备在第一时隙内监测的控制资源集；所述第一时隙为一个或多个时隙中距离参考时隙最近的一个时隙，所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙中配置有一个或多个控制资源集，且所述一个或多个时隙中的每个时隙内配置的一个或多个资源集中至少有一个控制资源集的接收波束在当前已激活的面板上；或
    在激活的上行带宽部分BWP中，当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上物理上行控制信道中ID最小的物理上行控制信道的发送所使用的波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由初始接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上由随机接入流程确定的用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次下行信号或下行信道的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于接收同步信号块的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次同步信号块的接收所使用的L个波束；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上第一同步信号块的接收波束，所述第一同步信号块由初始接入流程确定；或
    当前已激活的N个面板上用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束中，距离所述参考时隙最近的M次的上行信号或上行信道的发送所使用的L个波束；
    其中，N≥1，1≤M≤N，1≤L≤N，L、M和N均为整数。
  35. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器，用于生成第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一波束，所述第一波束为终端设备用于接收下行信号或下行信道的波束，且所述第一波束是所述终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    收发器，用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。
  36. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器，用于生成第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示第一波束，所述第一波束为终端设备用于发送上行信号或上行信道的波束，且所述第一波束是所述终端设备当前已激活的面板上的波束；
    收发器，用于向所述终端设备发送所述第一指示信息。
  37. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置用于实现如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法。
  38. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置用于实现如权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法。
  39. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置用于实现如权利要求11所述的方法。
  40. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述装置用于实现如权利要求12所述的方法。
  41. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法。
  42. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法。
  43. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求11所述的方法。
  44. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器，所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求12所述的方法。
  45. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储计算机程序；
    处理器，用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法。
  46. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储计算机程序；
    处理器，用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法。
  47. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储计算机程序；
    处理器，用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求11所述的方法。
  48. 一种处理装置，其特征在于，包括：
    存储器，用于存储计算机程序；
    处理器，用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序，以使得所述装置实现如权利要求12所述的方法。
  49. 一种计算机可读介质，其特征在于，包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法。
  50. 一种计算机可读介质，其特征在于，包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法。
  51. 一种计算机可读介质，其特征在于，包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求11所述的方法。
  52. 一种计算机可读介质，其特征在于，包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求12所述的方法。
  53. 一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求1至5中任一项所述的方法。
  54. 一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求6至10中任一项所述的方法。
  55. 一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求11所述的方法。
  56. 一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如权利要求12所述的方法。
PCT/CN2020/074626 2019-02-15 2020-02-10 信号传输方法和通信装置 WO2020164454A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910118215.6A CN111586858B (zh) 2019-02-15 2019-02-15 信号传输方法和通信装置
CN201910118215.6 2019-02-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020164454A1 true WO2020164454A1 (zh) 2020-08-20

Family

ID=72044014

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/074626 WO2020164454A1 (zh) 2019-02-15 2020-02-10 信号传输方法和通信装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN111586858B (zh)
WO (1) WO2020164454A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114765784A (zh) * 2021-01-15 2022-07-19 北京紫光展锐通信技术有限公司 一种默认波束的确定方法、装置、基站和存储介质

Families Citing this family (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112399465B (zh) * 2019-08-16 2022-11-11 华为技术有限公司 一种天线面板状态的指示方法及装置
CN114258134A (zh) * 2020-09-23 2022-03-29 华为技术有限公司 波束管理方法、装置及系统
CN114499785B (zh) * 2020-10-23 2024-08-13 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 波束指示方法、终端、网络侧设备、装置和存储介质
US20240106608A1 (en) * 2020-12-03 2024-03-28 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. Method and device for beam indication, and storage medium
WO2022133896A1 (en) * 2020-12-24 2022-06-30 Zte Corporation Systems and methods for srs triggering flexibility enhancement
CN113316234B (zh) * 2021-05-28 2022-07-19 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Srs的发送方法及终端设备
WO2023011529A1 (zh) * 2021-08-06 2023-02-09 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 一种波束生效时间确定方法、装置、终端和网络设备
WO2023050298A1 (en) * 2021-09-30 2023-04-06 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited Methods and apparatus of qcl determination for epdcch ordered cfra
CN118784043A (zh) * 2023-04-07 2024-10-15 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种天线面板指示方法及装置

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7397425B2 (en) * 2004-12-30 2008-07-08 Microsoft Corporation Electronically steerable sector antenna
CN108476050A (zh) * 2015-11-11 2018-08-31 瑞典爱立信有限公司 用于波束管理的网络节点、无线设备和方法
CN108780946A (zh) * 2016-03-11 2018-11-09 夏普株式会社 扫描天线及扫描天线的检查方法
CN109150439A (zh) * 2017-06-16 2019-01-04 电信科学技术研究院 一种数据传输方法、装置、网络侧设备和用户设备

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7397425B2 (en) * 2004-12-30 2008-07-08 Microsoft Corporation Electronically steerable sector antenna
CN108476050A (zh) * 2015-11-11 2018-08-31 瑞典爱立信有限公司 用于波束管理的网络节点、无线设备和方法
CN108780946A (zh) * 2016-03-11 2018-11-09 夏普株式会社 扫描天线及扫描天线的检查方法
CN109150439A (zh) * 2017-06-16 2019-01-04 电信科学技术研究院 一种数据传输方法、装置、网络侧设备和用户设备

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
AT&T: "UE feature prioritization for NR Rel. 15", 3GPP TSG RAN MEETING #80 RP-180793, 14 June 2018 (2018-06-14), DOI: 20200407163552X *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114765784A (zh) * 2021-01-15 2022-07-19 北京紫光展锐通信技术有限公司 一种默认波束的确定方法、装置、基站和存储介质

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111586858B (zh) 2023-06-20
CN111586858A (zh) 2020-08-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020164454A1 (zh) 信号传输方法和通信装置
US12063649B2 (en) System and method for bandwidth part operation
WO2020156174A1 (zh) 波束指示的方法和通信装置
CN110809321B (zh) 接收和发送信号的方法以及通信装置
EP3820225B1 (en) Multi access point coordination of target wake time schedules
WO2020103793A1 (zh) 波束上报的方法和通信装置
WO2018126952A1 (zh) 通信方法、网络设备、及终端设备
WO2020057459A1 (zh) 指示波束的方法和装置
WO2020248779A1 (zh) 更新传输配置指示tci信息的方法与通信装置
US11553430B2 (en) System and method for control channel reception in power save mode
WO2021254954A1 (en) Methods and apparatuses for enhanced csi reporting with respect to multiple downlink resources
WO2022077478A1 (zh) 一种基于波束的通信方法以及相关装置
CN110932820A (zh) 发送和接收上行控制信息的方法以及通信装置
US20230145663A1 (en) System and Method for Control Channel Reception in Power Save Mode
WO2020238617A1 (zh) 确定小区激活时延的方法和装置
WO2023011195A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及通信装置
KR20230110629A (ko) RedCap UE들의 식별을 위한 방법 및 장치
WO2023051188A1 (zh) 分组管理方法和通信装置
WO2020192719A1 (zh) 更新波束的方法与通信装置
WO2021013138A1 (zh) 无线网络通信方法和通信装置
WO2021088038A1 (zh) 一种参考信号测量方法、资源指示方法及装置
WO2022237803A1 (zh) 通信方法以及相关联的装置、介质和芯片
WO2023030060A1 (zh) 一种通信方法和设备
WO2024032767A1 (zh) 上行传输方法以及相关装置
WO2023142122A1 (zh) 通信方法、装置、终端设备、芯片、介质、产品及程序

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20755898

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20755898

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1